JP7424410B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning result .

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2006-000392

However, there was a problem that the game became monotonous and the player quickly became bored with the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

To achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first determining means capable of executing the first determining, and a first determining result by the first determining means is a specific first determining result. A first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect that is terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed based on a certain fact, and a second discrimination capable of executing a second discrimination. and a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect based on the second discrimination result by the second discrimination means being a specific second discrimination result, The machine is configured such that at the timing when the first performance is started , the machine is in a first state in which the second determination by the second determination means can be performed, and the first performance is When the first effect is terminated by being continuously executed for the predetermined period after being started, a second state is set in which the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is not executed. , based on the fact that the second discrimination result by the second discrimination means has become the specific second discrimination result from the start of the first performance until it is continuously executed for the predetermined period , It is configured such that the first performance can be forcibly terminated, and when the second determination result is the specific second determination result, the player is more likely to is configured such that advantageous benefits are granted to the user, and is configured to be capable of displaying a suggestion aspect for suggesting that the first state is set during the period in which the first state is set, The first state is terminated when the number of times the second determination is performed by the second determination means is a predetermined number of times after the first performance is continuously performed for the predetermined period of time. The present invention is configured such that the first discrimination by the first discrimination means is not executed during a period in which the first performance is executed .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, based on the first determination means capable of executing the first determination and the first determination result by the first determination means being a specific first determination result, , a first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect that is terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed; a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination; a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect based on the second discrimination result by the second discrimination means being a specific second discrimination result; At the timing when the first performance is started , the second determination by the second determination means is in a first state in which the second determination can be performed , and the first performance is continued after the first performance is started. is configured such that when the first effect is terminated by being executed for the predetermined period , a second state is set in which the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is not executed, and the first effect is Forcing the first effect based on the fact that the second discrimination result by the second discrimination means has become the specific second discrimination result from the time when the second discrimination result is continuously executed for the predetermined period of time after the start of the process. When the second determination result is the specific second determination result, the game player is provided with benefits that are more advantageous to the player than when the second determination result is not the specific second determination result. and is configured to be able to display a suggestion aspect for suggesting that the first state is set during a period in which the first state is set, and the first effect is The first state can be terminated if the number of times the second determination is performed by the second determination means is a predetermined number of times from when it is started until it is continuously performed for the predetermined period of time. and is configured such that the first determination by the first determination means is not performed during the period in which the first performance is being performed .

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved .

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a back view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the third symbol in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on a display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when there is only a reserved ball in special drawing 1 at the end of a jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, It is a figure showing an example of display contents at the time of dash mode displayed on a 3rd pattern display device in one embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment at the end of the dash mode, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of performance when the potential state is set after the jackpot is displayed, and (c) is the third symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of performance when a potential state is set after the end of the jackpot displayed on the device and the number of reserved balls in one special drawing is 1 to 4. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of ROM of the main control device in a 1st embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main controller in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. It is a schematic diagram showing typically the composition of the jackpot type selection table set in ROM of the main control device in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variable jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a small hit type selection table set in ROM of a device typically. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability variation table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a potential confirmation table set in . FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a regular figure fluctuation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. be. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a first embodiment. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images when the power is turned on. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces B to D. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating the back surface E. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation execution process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 2 temporary stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation execution process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off stop process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 cancellation processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetching process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a through gate passage process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing jackpot operation setting processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing special figure 1 fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing special figure 2 fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flow chart which showed pending ball number processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing status command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 12 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing confirmation-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing temporary stop related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing restart processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing the win-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing jackpot related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing small hit related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 3 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in a display control device. It is a timing chart showing the flow of effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the ending screen of the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol display in the second embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a display screen displayed on the device during a variable probability state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents after the start of variation per special figure 1 (special figure 2 non-variation) displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in the case of special figure 2 small winning during RUSH displayed by the 3rd pattern display device in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents after the start of variation per special figure 1 (during special figure 2 variation) displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is It is a figure showing an example of display contents when special figure 2 variation stops during variation per special figure 1 displayed on the 3rd pattern display device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the contents of the jackpot special selection 2 table for probability variable potential probability set in the ROM of the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow of a pachinko machine in a second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in a main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of ROM of the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of three small winning random number tables set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number 3 table set in the ROM. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the main control in the third embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a regular pattern variation pattern 3 table set in the ROM of the device. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a migration destination selection table set in a ROM of a main control device in a third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a migration destination selection table set in a ROM of a main control device in a third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a transition 1 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a transition 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special table set in a ROM of a main controller in a third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off fluctuation|variation process 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 88, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entry ports 63, 64b1, 64b2, 640, etc. into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area (gaming area) of the game board 13, and a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached to guide the target up to the target point. The contents of the numerous ball entry holes provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG. 2.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 9). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball naturally falls and is ejected from the bottom opening. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general entrance. Ball mouth 63, upper first ball entrance 64b1, lower first ball entrance 64b2, second ball entrance 640, left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650, normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, variable It is constructed by assembling the display device unit 80 and the like, and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures disposed on the rear side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general ball entry port 63, the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, the left variable winning device 65, the right variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are made of through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the hole and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

A first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. This first symbol display device 37 is disposed so as to be covered by the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) of the game board 13 formed of transparent resin (for example, ABS). The ball is configured to prevent the shot ball from colliding with the first symbol display device 37.

This first symbol display device 37 is provided with first symbol display devices 37a and 37b each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display whether the ball has entered (won) the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2, or whether the ball has entered the second ball entry port 640. It is configured so that it can be used differently depending on whether the ball hit the ball or not. Specifically, when a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 (wins a prize), the first symbol display device 37a is activated; However, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (wins), the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate. In other words, the first symbol display device 37a shows the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2. The first symbol display device 37b serves as a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special drawing 2 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. .

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate which of the gaming states (variable probability state, potential state, normal state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is in, or to display changes in the first symbol. It is possible to indicate by the lighting state whether it is a medium (during dynamic display to stop and display a combination of symbols to show the lottery result), or whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a jackpot that is advantageous to the player or a symbol that is disadvantageous to the player. The lighting state indicates whether the symbol corresponds to a jackpot or a missed symbol, and the number of balls on hold is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during a jackpot and an error are displayed by a 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs. In this embodiment, various gaming states are notified by combinations of emitted light colors of the light emitting means (seven segment display device), but any other structure may be used as long as the player can identify the various gaming states. For example, various game states may be notified by varying the length of the period in which the light emitting means is on and the period in which it is off (blinking mode).

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (special symbol lottery) is held when a ball enters (prizes) into the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640. will be held. Then, in the special symbol drawing, a judgment is made as to whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot drawing). Here, based on the fact that it has been determined that the player has won the jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the bonus game state is advantageous to the player.

When a jackpot game is executed, it becomes an open state in which it is possible to easily enter a ball into the specific winning hole 65a of the left variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the right variable winning device 650, and each winning hole is opened. A game is executed in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short period of time by winning balls. During this jackpot game, the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and then the opening period is a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). , a period in which a closed state is set in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the V winning hole 650a of the right variable winning device 650), a round game period in which an open state is set, and after the end of the first round game period, the next round game period is set. A predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) before the round game starts, an interval period during which the closed state is set, and a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) of closure after the end of the last round game period. A jackpot game period consisting of an ending period in which the state is set and a jackpot game period is set.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the special symbol lottery result indicating a jackpot win is stopped (confirmed display), the ball can be released in time with the opening of each winning opening during the jackpot game. Since preparations can be made to fire the ball in any direction, jackpot games can be played smoothly. Furthermore, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the players of the game contents of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a new special symbol lottery from being executed immediately after the last round game ends. Since preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction for the game to be played, it is possible to smoothly switch between games.

Furthermore, when it is determined that there is a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the type of jackpot is also determined. A detailed explanation will be given later, but the types of jackpots that are determined are 16R potential jackpot, which is given a high probability state for special symbols, and a low probability state for normal symbols after the jackpot game ends with 16 rounds, and a jackpot. A high probability state of special symbols after the jackpot ends when the number of rounds of the game is 2, a 2R potential jackpot that gives a low probability of normal symbols, a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends when the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 2 rounds , a 2R probability-variable jackpot is prepared in which a low-probability state with a normal symbol is given.

In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the jackpot lottery result is not the above-mentioned jackpot but a miss, the player is given fewer benefits than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, if the right variable winning device 650 is used only for one round) Bonus for opening) Small wins are available. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot (or not) as a stop symbol after the variation ends (or not), but also indicate whether the lottery result is a jackpot or not. The symbols according to the type of jackpot are shown.

In this embodiment, the gaming state is configured to be set to one of the "normal state", "potential state", and "probable variable state" (see FIG. 14). The normal state is a gaming state in which the jackpot probability of special symbols is set to a low probability (1/229), and the winning probability of normal symbols is set to a low probability (11/233) (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: low probability state, Normal symbol: referred to as low probability state), and in the potential state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability (1/120), and the probability of winning the normal symbol is set to a low probability (11/233). (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: low probability state), and in the variable probability state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability (1/120), This is a gaming state in which the probability is set to high probability (232/233) (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: high probability state and normal symbol: high probability state).

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, even if a special symbol jackpot is won and the same jackpot type is set, the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot will be changed. The game state set after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the situation. Thereby, it is possible to make the player play the game while being aware of the set gaming state in addition to the lottery result of the special symbol.

Here, "16R potential jackpot" means a jackpot game where the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds (a jackpot game where the right variable prize winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 16 rounds), and then the special symbol enters a high probability state. It refers to a jackpot that can be transferred, and when a low probability state of normal symbols is set after a jackpot game, a probability state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game. In addition, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game in the case of winning the "16R potential jackpot" is variably set according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, as described above.

Here, "2R potential jackpot" refers to a jackpot game where the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds (a jackpot game in which the left variable prize winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened for 2 rounds), and then a special symbol is entered into a high probability state. It refers to a jackpot that can be transferred, and when a low probability state of normal symbols is set after a jackpot game, a probability state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game.

"2R variable jackpot" is a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds (the left variable prize winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened for 2 rounds, and after the jackpot game, a state with high probability of normal symbols and high probability of special symbols is set, and the game state is set to be variable.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when a jackpot game corresponding to the "16R potential jackpot" is executed, the right variable prize winning device (second attacker) 650 is activated for a predetermined period (30 seconds have elapsed, or 10 balls have passed). Since the game (round game) that is released (period until winning a prize) is executed a predetermined number of times (16 times), a right-handed game (a game in which a ball is fired aiming at the right variable winning device 650) during a jackpot game By doing this, it is possible to cause the winning ball in the right variable winning device 650 to flow down into the special discharge channel 650e2.

On the other hand, in the jackpot game corresponding to the "2R guaranteed variable jackpot", the opening operation of the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is more restricted than in the jackpot game corresponding to the "16R potential jackpot" described above. be done. Specifically, a game (round game) in which the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) during one jackpot game, and a jackpot game in which the left variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened only twice. executed.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. A general ball entrance 63 is provided on the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the game board 13. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 has first symbol display devices 37a, 37b triggered by a ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning). A third symbol display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variable display of the symbol, and a normal symbol starting gate (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) comprising an LED that variably displays a second symbol using the passing of the ball as a trigger is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that the third symbol display device 81 can display three symbols, for example, upper, middle, and lower. Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37a, 37b that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. Note that, instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device displays an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. This is a variable display in which the lights are turned on alternately for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (the "○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 It is configured to be in an activated state (open state) for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, as a process for determining that an illegal game (a right-handed game during a normal state) is being performed and reporting an abnormality, the number of second special symbols held and stored by the right-handed game is determined to be a predetermined number (2 or more). It is preferable to configure the system so that an abnormality notification is executed when it is determined that the number of errors has occurred. Therefore, the abnormality notification may be executed when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a small amount (one shot) of a ball fired due to a player's operation error from entering the right side area and causing an abnormality notification to be executed.

In addition, in the high probability state of normal symbols (high probability state of common symbols), other methods can be used to increase the probability of winning, such as increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 64a per hit. If the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2 during play, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than in the normal state during normal and high accuracy, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 64a may be made constant regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left side area of the variable display unit 80, and is used to detect a portion of the balls that flow down the right side of the game board among the balls fired at the game board. (approximately 50%) is configured to allow passage. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of balls held is displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84 mentioned above. The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided in four, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, but is set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). You may do so. Further, the number of normal symbol starting ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, to the right side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

An upper first ball entry port 64b1 into which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. Furthermore, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64b1, a first ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the result is that the first ball entry switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

A lower first ball entry port 64b2 into which a ball can enter is provided below the first upper ball entry port 64b1. When a ball enters the lower first ball entry port 64b2, a first ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entry switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

To the right of the lower first ball entry port 64b2 and in the right side area of the game board 13 (lower area of the channel unit 3660), a second ball entry port 640 into which a ball can enter is provided. . When a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second ball entrance switch, The main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a jackpot lottery, and the first symbol display device 37b displays a display according to the lottery result. Further, a general ball entrance 63 is provided in the left side area of the game board.

When a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640, one ball is paid out. The ball is configured to be paid out as a prize ball. Further, when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. With this configuration, even if a right-handed game is played during the normal state, the ball will only enter the second ball entrance 640 where the prize ball is set to one, so the number of balls will increase. There's nothing to do.

Furthermore, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second special symbol (special symbol 2) is drawn, but in this embodiment, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is drawn. It is configured such that a long time (for example, 10 minutes) variation pattern (variation time) is set as a variation pattern (variation time) set for the lottery of 2 special symbols (special symbol 2). Therefore, even if the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed in the normal state, it is possible to efficiently suppress the lottery of the special symbol 2 from being executed.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the normal state is set as the game state, a left-handed game (the first special symbol (special symbol 1) lottery is executed by letting the ball flow down to the left side area of the game board 13) Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to play a game in which the ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640. The number of prize balls paid out is different from the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the opening 640 is the same number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2. The number may also be one.

As shown in FIG. 2, an electric accessory 640a is attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2. This electric accessory 64a is configured in the shape of a single blade, and can be in a closed state (see FIG. 2) that restricts the ball from entering the lower first ball entry port 64b2, and in a closed state that restricts the ball from entering the lower first ball entry port 64b2. It is variably controlled to an open state (see FIG. 3) that allows the ball to enter the ball 64b2.

The electric accessory 64a is normally located in a closed state, and is configured so that a ball cannot enter the lower first ball entry opening 64b2. Then, based on the fact that the normal symbol (second symbol) has been won by lottery, the ball is variably operated to the open state for a predetermined period of time so that the ball can easily enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. It is configured.

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 is connected to the front side, which consists of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing, a solenoid for driving electric accessories, etc., and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 for performance.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, an accessory drive command is sent to the other device 228 in order to drive a performance accessory (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is sent. It is possible to set an audio output command for outputting audio to the audio output device 226, or to set a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a lighting mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22. It may be configured as follows.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7(a). FIGS. 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns (top, middle, and bottom) ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 5(a)). The third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (a decorative symbol that changes in response to the variable display of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the second special symbol (special symbol 2)) is It is composed of 10 types of main symbols each with identification information imitating the numbers "0" to "9".

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the main symbols are formed using different types of characters (animals, etc.) for each identification information imitating a number. In this way, by using the characters that correspond to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777") is performed, and the variable display It is structured so that the jackpot occurs after the end of the game. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

In the main display area Dm, three upper, middle, and lower symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and are periodically scrolled in the left and right direction for each symbol row L1 to L3 to perform a variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are configured such that symbol rows are formed such that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left to be displayed in a variable manner. The lower symbol row L3 is formed such that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and is configured to be scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. Further, in each symbol row, sub-symbols (blank symbols) that do not indicate the lottery result of the special symbol are formed between the main symbols.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the main display area Dm has three effective lines V1 to V3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines V4 and V5 formed in the diagonal direction. With each symbol row L1 to L3 being stopped and displayed, the third symbols are stopped on the active line with a jackpot symbol combination (in the first embodiment, the same main symbol combination). For example, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), in the first embodiment, each active line (V1 to V5) is formed to include the symbol display position of each symbol row L1 to L3, so the third symbol The lottery result of the corresponding special symbol can be made difficult to understand until all of the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, until the last symbol row (in this embodiment, the middle symbol row L2) is stopped and displayed, it is possible to create interest in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

Note that the manner in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-mentioned one and may be arbitrary, and may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the direction of fluctuating display of the symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in a column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those mentioned above, and for example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the variable display area smaller or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing or not. You may also do so. Further, during the period in which the special symbols are varying, the variation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and may be varied again.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol is the same as the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify the third symbol). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed to correspond to the type of special symbol that is changing.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 5(b). As shown in FIG. 5(b), small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed at the upper right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. These small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas where identification information (fourth symbol) is displayed to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether it is in the lottery (changing) or not, and the lottery result). Then, the fourth symbol (special symbol 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is displayed. The configuration is such that a fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the following is displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery status of the special symbols in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbols 1 and 2 can be varied at the same time. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and by variably displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. (See FIG. 6(a)), it shows the situation where the special symbol is changing, and by stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 6(a)), the special symbol is drawn by lottery. Although the configuration is configured to show the results, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes, for example, a display mode in which a figure is imitated as the fourth symbol, a display mode in which a figure is transformed using a display mode that shows a plurality of colors, It may be configured to show the special symbol lottery results by indicating that the special symbol is changing by a display mode in which the color is varied, and by stopping and displaying a display mode showing a specific symbol or color.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not it is in the lottery (changing) and the lottery result), but this is not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is being drawn (changing). In addition, as shown in FIG. 5(b), in this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is replaced with the main display area. Although an example is shown in which the fourth symbol display area is formed on the upper right side of the area Dm, the position and size where this fourth symbol display area is formed can be changed depending on the presentation mode of the variable effect executed in the center part of the main display area Dm. It may be different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from limiting the area in which the variable performance is performed and reducing the performance effect. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the fourth symbol is displayed variably using the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is best to configure it to run.

A small display area Dm3 is formed at the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. In this small display area Dm3, a guide display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be launched (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 6(a)).

In this embodiment, the small display area Dm3 is used as a guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily understand which area of the game board he should shoot the ball toward just by visually checking the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

In this guidance display area (small display area Dm3), there is a display mode of "right-handed play" for guiding the player to play a right-handed game, and a display mode for instructing the player to play a left-handed game. A display mode for "left-handed play" and a display mode for "right-handed play" are displayed to guide the player. It is displayed during a potential state and during a specific jackpot game (during a jackpot game in which the right variable prize winning device 650 is opened), and the display mode of "left-hand hit" is displayed for a predetermined period after the right-hand hit game ends (e.g. , 10 seconds). Also, if it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, a normal state or a variable probability state, the game will be activated for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The configuration is such that a display format of ``Left-handed batting'' is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5(b), the explanation will be continued. Small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are formed on the left side of the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1 and Dm2). These small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are areas where a pending number display mode for showing the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed, and the small display area Dm1a is an area in which the number of reserved balls (reserved) of the first special symbol is displayed. Special figure 1 reservation information for indicating the number of reserved balls (number of stored balls) of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm2a, and special figure 2 reservation information for indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (number of reserved memory) is displayed.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 6(a), but the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a display the winning information held and stored in advance in addition to the value indicating the number of balls held for the corresponding special symbol. The determined result (pre-read result) is configured to be displayed in a display mode that can be suggested and reported to the player. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game that will be executed in the future (the lottery result of the special symbol that has been stored on hold).

Furthermore, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 6(a), this sub-display area Ds is configured to display comments regarding the content of the game being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player. Note that the sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose, for example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm4 and Dm5 may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It may be configured.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to display a pending display mode (eg, a circular pending symbol display mode) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in the sub display area Ds. Further, it is preferable to configure the game system so that the player can grasp the current number of reserved balls of the special symbol based on the displayed number of reserved display modes. Furthermore, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold, and to vary the corresponding hold display mode based on the result of the determination.

With this configuration, the player can play the game with the expectation that he or she will win the jackpot by drawing a special symbol that corresponds to the reserved symbol whose display mode has been changed among the plurality of reserved symbols that may exist. can be set. Furthermore, unlike the present embodiment, since the configuration is such that the suspended symbols are displayed corresponding to the individual number of suspended symbols, the display mode is designed to show the game result that may be advantageous to the player among the multiple suspended symbols. A result display that easily displays a variable pending symbol display can be set.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to this, a game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display being executed in the main display area Dm. A performance explanation mode for explaining, a frame button related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and a winning related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are in the sub display area Ds. The display area ratio between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to vary depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination that corresponds to a loss, and there are held balls, after a 1-second stop display, a fluctuating display corresponding to the lottery based on the held balls will start. . In addition, when a plurality of reserved balls exist, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there are no reserved balls, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state occurs when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) passes, or when a new ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1, the lower first ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entry port 640. Continue until the ball hits. Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Even though the player shoots the ball continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), if any of the upper first ball entry port 64b1, the lower first ball entry port 64b2, and the second ball entry port 640 It is rare that a ball does not enter the pachinko machine, and in many cases when the third symbol remains stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits playing and the pachinko machine 10 This is due to the fact that no games are played at all.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, a player who is about to select the pachinko machine 10 to start a game can easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on the presence or absence of a demonstration effect being displayed. On the other hand, a new ball enters any of the upper first ball entry port 64b1, the lower first ball entry port 64b2, and the second ball entry port 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. If so, a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball entry is executed.

Next, the performance contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. This third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), this is used as a trigger to display the first special ball in the first symbol display device 37. A variable display of the symbol (special symbol 1) or the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol 1 or 2, a variable performance of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that special symbols 1 and 2 can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, and the ease with which each special symbol can be drawn (varied) depending on the set gaming state. are configured differently. Then, the lottery (variation) is executed in the game state in which the third symbol that is the target of the variation effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 is set among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The third symbol corresponds to a special symbol that is likely to be played. By configuring in this way, no matter which game state is set, the variable performance using the third symbol can always be easily executed, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

First, referring to FIGS. 7(b) and 7(c), the game when a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game of this embodiment. Explain the flow. In this embodiment, different gaming states are set after the jackpot ends depending on the jackpot type. When a potential state is set after the end of the jackpot, the special figure 2 game (right-handed game) is set to be advantageous to the player. In the special figure 2 game, settings are made such that a small win and a jackpot D, which is most advantageous to the player, are won in order to be advantageous to the player.

However, in this embodiment, it is a simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, and when a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 during the special chart 2 game, the special chart 1 changes. However, there is a risk that the player may win a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, and provide a game that gives the player a sense of distrust. In order to solve this problem, in this embodiment, if you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery or win a jackpot in the special drawing 1, the lottery result (variable result) will be forced to stop or temporarily stopped if you win. Configure it so that In a game where the probability state is displayed after the jackpot ends, if there is a reserved ball on special drawing 1, immediately execute the right-handed game and enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 to achieve a small hit. It is configured to display an effect on the third symbol display device 81 to encourage the player to win.

First, with reference to FIG. 7(b), the flow of display of the effect when there is no special figure 1 reserved ball at the time of ED in a jackpot that shifts to a potential state after the jackpot ends will be explained. If there is no special figure 1 reserved ball at the ending (ED) of the jackpot (see Figure 7 (b) A), the ED for super mode corresponding to the potential state is executed as the display content, and when the ED ends (Figure 7 (b) If there is no special figure 1 reserved ball in (see B), the effect of super mode (mode corresponding to the potential state) is displayed.

On the other hand, if there is a special figure 1 reserved ball at the end of a jackpot, the game state is set to a potential state, but the dash mode is displayed to prompt the player to immediately play a right-handed game. It consists of FIG. 7(c) is a diagram showing the flow of performance when there are 1 to 4 special figure 1 reserved balls at the ED of the jackpot in a jackpot that shifts to a potential state after the jackpot ends. As shown in FIG. 7(c), if there is a pending number of balls at the ending of the jackpot (see FIG. 7(c)A), an ending for a dash is displayed.

Specifically, this will be explained with reference to FIG. 6(a). FIG. 6(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when there is only the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 at the ending of a jackpot. A rabbit character 811 and a turtle character 814 are displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters are used to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player. This character 811 is configured so that it does not appear (is not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the period in which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is A gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state is created. With this configuration, the player can understand the outline of the currently set game state by knowing whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen, so that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. can be provided.

If there is only a reserved ball in special drawing 1 at the end of the jackpot, a guidance display mode of "right-handed hitting" is displayed in the display area Dm3, and " Hurry up and hit to the right and reach the goal before the turtle!!'' is displayed. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that there is a need to quickly hit the ball to the right. Further, in the small display area Dm4a to Dm4e, a display mode indicating the remaining special figure 1 reserved balls and the number of consumed balls is displayed. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in special map 1 is 0, Dm4a, when the number of reserved balls is 1, Dm4a to Dm4b, when the number of reserved balls is 2, Dm4a to Dm4c, and when the number of reserved balls is 2. If the number of balls held is 3, Dm4a to Dm4d are lit, and if the number of balls held is 4, Dm4a to Dm4e are lit. Then, "GOAL" is displayed in the small display area 0, and it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the mode is aimed at reducing the number of reserved balls of special drawing 1 to 0.

Returning to FIG. 7(c), the explanation will be continued. As mentioned above, the ending for the dash mode is displayed when there is a special number 1 pending ball at the ending of the jackpot (see Figure 7 (c) (A)), but the ED ends and the state shifts to the potential state. In this case, if there is a special figure 1 reserved ball (see FIGS. 7(c) and (B)), the dash mode is displayed as an effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6(b), the display screen of the dash mode that is displayed when the potential state is reached with the number of special figure 1 reserved balls will be explained. FIG. 6(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the dash mode. In this embodiment, during the potential state, it is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 by playing a right-handed game and execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. has been done. Then, when a jackpot or a small hit is won with the second special symbol, the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol can be temporarily stopped, or it can be forced to stop when it is a miss. Furthermore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the probability game, 1/2 is configured to win a small hit, and the first special symbol is more likely to win than the second special symbol during the variation time during the probability state. Since a long fluctuation time is set, there is a very rare possibility that the first special symbol will win a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player while the second special symbol is fluctuating.

However, if the player does not perform a right-handed game when only the first special symbol has the number of pending balls after the transition to the potential state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol will elapse and the player will win a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. There was a possibility that it would happen. Therefore, in this embodiment, if there is a reserved ball with the first special symbol after the jackpot ends, instead of the super mode that is displayed during the potential state, the dash mode is used to make the player quickly execute the right-handed game. is displayed, and an effect is executed to cause the reserved balls of the first special symbol to be used up.

In FIG. 7(b), a character 811 imitating a rabbit and a character 814 imitating a turtle competing for the GOAL 812 are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the sub display area Ds The comment "Hurry up and hit the right hand!!" is displayed. Furthermore, a guidance display mode for "hitting right" is also displayed in the small display area Dm3. In this way, by displaying the display mode that guides the right-handed game in both the sub-display area Ds and the small display area Dm3, it is possible to more emphatically notify the player about the right-handed game. In addition, by changing the content of the guidance display mode to guide the player on the appropriate playing method according to the degree of disadvantage to the player, the player can continue to play disadvantageous games. It is possible to prevent it from being put away.

The small display area Dm1 and the small display area Dm2 display that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the small display region Dm2a displays the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. The state in which you have acquired two is displayed. Moreover, it is displayed in the small display area Dm1a that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is one. Therefore, as described above, the small display areas Dm4a to Dm4b are lit to indicate that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 1.

Returning to FIG. 7(c), the explanation will be continued. The dash mode ends when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes 0, and switches to a performance for the super mode corresponding to the potential state.

Here, the display screen indicating the end of the dash mode will be described with reference to FIG. 7(a). In this embodiment, as described above, when a jackpot or small hit is won with the second special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, or is forcibly stopped with a missed symbol, and the dash mode is A super mode that ends when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes 0 by winning a small hit with the second special symbol while in a potential state, and indicates to the player that the player is in a potential state. This is the display mode.

In the center of the main display area Dm, a character 811 modeled after a rabbit who was competing during the dash mode is shown passing a GOAL 812 before a character modeled after a turtle 814. Then, the comment "GOAL!!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, clearly informing the player that the dash mode has ended.

Then, in the small display area Dm2, the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode "246" indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win, and at the same time, the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1. The fourth symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode "357" indicating that the lottery result is a loss. Further, the upper display area Dm4a is lit up to clearly notify the player that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has run out, and the dash mode is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won with the second special symbol, the Dm1 that displays the fluctuation result of the first special symbol is configured to forcibly stop the missed symbol as it is, but this fluctuation result is read in advance, If it is determined that the variation is a jackpot win, the stop display mode and the color of the number of prize balls due to the small hit may be varied and displayed when the variation is forcibly stopped due to a missed symbol. With this configuration, the player can feel secure knowing that he or she has been able to prevent winning an unfavorable jackpot. Further, if the pre-reading result is a jackpot, the color of the variable display may be changed and displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player, and it is possible to further enhance the presentation effect.

<About the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be explained. FIG. 8 is a transition diagram showing the flow of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 8, in the first embodiment, the gaming states include a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols). There are three game states that can be set: probability state), probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and the type of jackpot won and the game at the time of winning the jackpot. It is configured such that a predetermined gaming state is set depending on the state (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

First, a case where the normal state is set as the gaming state will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is in an initial state (a state in which the process is executed when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 9) has been operated during the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 51). ), the normal state is set as the gaming state.

During this normal state, if you win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the jackpot type is set to jackpot A (71% of the jackpot winnings), you can try again after the jackpot game ends. A normal state is set, a jackpot A (50% of jackpot winning) is set, and after the end of the jackpot game, a variable probability state (challenge mode) is set. Further, jackpot B (25% of jackpot winnings) and jackpot C (4% of jackpot winnings) are configured such that a potential state (super mode) is set after the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the normal state, jackpot D is set as the jackpot type (100% of jackpot winning), and after the jackpot game ends, The configuration is such that a secure state (super mode) is set.

In other words, under normal conditions, if you win the jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery, there is a 71% probability that you will enter challenge mode, and if you enter super mode with a 29% probability, and if you win the jackpot in the special drawing 2 drawing. The configuration is such that a variable probability state is set with a probability of 100%.

In this way, in this embodiment, the game state set after the jackpot game is configured to differ depending on the game content during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the game executed during the jackpot game can be improved. Can be done.

Next, the flow of transition of the gaming state when the variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the gaming state will be explained. In this embodiment, while the probability variable state is set, the left-handed game is executed and the special drawing 1 lottery is executed. Then, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery during the probability variable state, if jackpot A (60% of the jackpot winning) is set as the jackpot type, after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation state (challenge mode ) is set to loop. Further, when jackpot B (25% of jackpot winning) and jackpot C (15% of jackpot winning) are set, a potential state (super mode) is set.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the special drawing 2 holding stored at the time when the variable probability state is set as the gaming state, the jackpot type is jackpot D (jackpot 100% of the winning amount) will be set. After the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability state is set again.

In other words, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery in a variable probability state, the probability variable state (challenge mode) will be set to loop with a 60% probability, and the potential probability state (super mode) will be set with a 40% probability. be done. When a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the variable probability state is set with a probability of 100%.

Finally, the flow of transition of the gaming state in a state where the potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the gaming state will be explained. In this embodiment, while the potential state is set, a game is performed in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly executed by a right-handed game. When a jackpot is won in the lottery of special drawings 2, when jackpot D (100% of jackpot winning) is set as the type of jackpot, the probability state is set again after the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, in a state where the probability state is set as the gaming state, if you win a jackpot in the lottery of special drawing 1, if jackpot A (60% of the jackpot winning) is set as the jackpot type, then the jackpot If a variable probability state is set after the end of the game, and jackpot B (25% of the jackpot winning) and jackpot C (15% of the jackpot winning) are set, the potential state (super mode) will be changed again after the end of the jackpot game. Set.

In other words, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery in the probability state, the full power mode (potential state) will be looped with a 40% probability, the probability variable state will be set with a 60% probability, and the special pattern 2 lottery If you win a jackpot, you will loop in a potential state (super mode) with a 100% probability.

Therefore, this embodiment is configured such that in a state where a potential state is set, executing the lottery of special drawing 2 can reliably loop the potential state, which is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the special symbol 2 is a special symbol that executes a lottery more advantageous to the player than the special symbol 1.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the number of jackpot hits reaches three, the normal state is always set after the third jackpot game is completed. Therefore, when winning the jackpot type that shifts to a potential state in the first jackpot, the player can execute a special figure 2 game in which the jackpot D, which is most advantageous to the player, is always won in the next two jackpots.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a state in which a gaming state other than the potential state is set, that is, a state in which the lottery of special drawing 1 is executed is defined as an appropriate gaming method. If the special figure 2 game is executed during the current gaming state and a jackpot is won, a potential state that is most advantageous to the player will be set, and there is a risk that excessive benefits will be given to the player. There is.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the special drawing 2 lottery is executed in a state where the normal state is set, a long variable time (10 minutes) is configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special drawing 2 lottery from being executed frequently during the normal state, so it is possible to prevent players from being given excessive benefits (benefits that set advantageous gaming states) in the normal state. Can be suppressed.

In addition, even if a player plays a game (right-handed game) that is different from a proper game (left-handed game) during the normal state where the probability of normal symbols is low, and the special drawing 2 lottery is executed, the player It is possible to prevent excessive benefits (benefits that set advantageous gaming conditions) from being given to players.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable probability state is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a higher probability than when the normal state is set, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. By configuring it so that it is difficult for the ball to enter, the special drawing 2 lottery is configured to be difficult to execute, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable probability state is set, it is more difficult to execute the special drawing lottery than when the normal state is set. , the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability, and the new special symbol 2 lottery is more likely to be executed (so that the special symbol 2 lottery is easier to be executed than the special symbol 1 lottery). It may be configured to set the fluctuation time or the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and specifically, the state where the variable probability state is set is longer than the state where the normal state is set, and the second special symbol is set. The time set as the variable time may be configured to be short (for example, 3 minutes).

With this configuration, when a variable probability state is set, a game in which the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is drawn with the aim of transitioning to a probability state, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. (Left-handed game) Although it does not shift to the potential state, by executing many special symbol drawings, we aim to see various variable effects (jackpot effects). The player can select 2) a game in which a lottery is performed (a right-handed game).

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 performs special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 9, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters etc. are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the following operations.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used in the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. a first winning type counter C2 used for the first win type counter C2, a stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbol, and a small win type counter (not shown) used to select the small hit type of the special symbol. A winning type counter C5, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used.

In addition, a second winning random number counter C4 is used for drawing the normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and a variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbols. A type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 28), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 52). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area corresponding to the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2, which are made up of four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4). 203a, and a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 consisting of four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas). 1. In the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, and a stop are placed in accordance with the timing of ball entry into the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2. The values of the type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 are stored respectively.

Then, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the first special symbol execution area. , special symbol variations based on the various stored values are started.

Similarly, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, The values of the small hit type counter C5 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored respectively.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , special symbol variations based on the various stored values are started.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (in parallel) execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Each of the reserved ball storage areas (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) is configured to have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting conditions for each special symbol are satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be executed promptly.

In addition, in this embodiment, since only the second special symbol is configured to have a small win as a lottery result, the value of the small win type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. However, for example, the lottery result of the first special symbol is configured to have a small win, and the value of the small win type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It may be configured.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, even in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a) corresponding to a special symbol type (first special symbol) that does not have a small hit as a lottery result, a small hit is possible. The configuration may be such that the value of the type counter C5 is stored. In this way, regardless of the specifications of the special symbol lottery (whether there is a small hit or not), the starting openings (upper first ball entrance 64b1, lower first ball entrance 64b2, second ball entrance It is configured to store all the respective counter values obtained by the ball entering the mouth 640), and when the special symbol starting condition (variation condition) is satisfied, the necessary counter values among the obtained counter values are By configuring the special symbol lottery to be executed using only the value, the same configuration can be used for multiple gaming machines with different special symbol lottery specifications (presence or absence of small wins). , parts and technology can be standardized, and costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, the RAM 203 of this embodiment has a normal symbol reserved corresponding to the ball entering (passing the ball) to the through gate 67 which is made up of four reserved areas (the first to fourth reserved areas) like the above-mentioned special symbols. A ball storage area 203c is provided, and in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, each value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 is stored in accordance with the timing of ball entry into the through gate 67. Each is stored.

Then, when the normal symbol starting condition (variation condition) is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the regular symbol reserved ball storage area 203c are shifted to the regular symbol execution area, and the various stored values are Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

Note that in this embodiment, each counter value obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is held and stored, and each counter value obtained based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is stored. Although it has a configuration that stores and stores values, it is not limited to this, and does not have a function (retention storage function) that stores each counter value obtained for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol). It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, in a gaming machine where a lottery of one special symbol type is switched between a lottery that is advantageous to the player and a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, an advantageous lottery can be executed. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different game state is set and an unfavorable lottery is executed with one special symbol in a state where a large number of reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired.

Next, each counter will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 479). It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the appropriate timing. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. If it matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained with reference to FIG. 11(a). FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first winning random number table 202a. This first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is defined.

Specifically, in the first winning random number table 202a, a determination value for determining a jackpot is commonly defined for the types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and A predetermined range of determination values is defined corresponding to the state (low probability state, high probability state). As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is set, "7 to 8" of the values of the first random number counter C1 are specified as the jackpot determination value. Any other value is defined as a determination value for a win other than a jackpot (that is, a small win or a miss).

In addition, when a high probability state (variable probability state, potential state) of the special symbol is set, "0 to 3" of the values of the first random number counter C1 are specified as the jackpot judgment value, and A value other than that is defined as a determination value for anything other than a big hit (that is, a small hit or a miss). In other words, in this embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, it is specified that the probability of winning the jackpot is 2/458 (1/227), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. If set, it is specified that the probability of winning the jackpot is 4/458 (1/109). Therefore, the high probability state of the special symbol is a game state in which it is easier to win a jackpot than the low probability state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is configured to be the same in the lottery with the first special symbol and the lottery with the second special symbol, but this is not limited to this. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the type of symbol, and for example, the jackpot probability may be lower for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. Further, in this embodiment, two types of jackpot probabilities of special symbols are prepared, a high probability state and a low probability state, but there may be one type, or three or more types. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be configured to be different for each of up to four types of gaming states that are set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, It is also possible to simply configure the state of the special symbol to be set in three or more types, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and to set a different jackpot probability for each state.

Further, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is also referred to when determining whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win. The value of the random number that becomes the small win of the special symbol is set by the small win random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is set in the small win random number table 202b. If it matches the random number value that results in a small hit specified in , it is determined that the special symbol has a small hit.

Here, the small hit random number table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 11(b). FIG. 11(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small winning random number table 202b. This small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is defined.

Specifically, in the small hit random number table 202b, the determination value for determining a small hit is defined for each type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the state of the special symbol (low A predetermined range of determination values is defined regardless of the probability state or high probability state. As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small win is not specified, and the first special symbol is selected by lottery for the first special symbol. It is stipulated that there is no chance of winning.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first win random number counter C1 corresponding to the small win is defined in the range of "112 to 342". In other words, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is 0 (does not win), and the probability of winning a small win in the second special symbol lottery is 224/458 (approximately 1/2 .1).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11(a) and (b), the first winning random number counter C1 value for winning the jackpot is different from the first winning random number counter C1 value for winning the small winning. It is configured so that in one process of executing the special symbol lottery (processing to determine whether there is a hit or not), the judgment of whether the jackpot is correct or not and the judgment whether the small win is correct or not are executed consecutively (simultaneously). are doing.

With this configuration, it is possible to perform a lottery for a big win or a small win with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first winning random number counter C1 value).

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit is defined as being different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the benefits given to the player different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, it is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm in order to perform more lottery drawings with more advantageous special symbols. As described above, in this embodiment, unless a specific gaming state (potential state) is set, the drawing of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is not executed frequently. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player play the game voluntarily so that a specific game state is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, a table (first winning random number table 202a) that is referred to when executing a jackpot lottery and a table (small winning random number table 202b) that is referred to when executing a small winning lottery are provided. Although they are configured separately, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single table may be used to execute the large winning lottery and the small winning lottery. In this case, for example, the first winning random number table 202a may be configured to define a range of counter values for winning a small win for each type of special symbol. With this configuration, the number of data tables included in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

As explained above, in this embodiment, a jackpot is determined according to a predetermined judgment value according to the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1, the type of special symbol, and the state of the special symbol. Although the system is configured to determine whether a winner or a small win has been won, the invention is not limited to this; for example, depending on the number of jackpot wins or the number of small win wins within a specific period until a predetermined condition is met, It may be configured to vary the first random number counter C1 value defined as a jackpot win or a small win, or a jackpot lottery or a small win that is executed when a predetermined abnormal condition is met. As a data table for abnormal times that is referred to in the lottery, a data table may be provided in which a determination value corresponding to a jackpot or a determination value corresponding to a small win is not defined.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, and A restriction is set so that the players do not win the jackpot at the same time (in parallel) (so that the jackpot game is not executed). In a pachinko machine 10 having such restrictions, for example, if a jackpot is won in the drawing of one special symbol, and until the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed, the lottery of the other special symbol will not be executed. In order to avoid winning the jackpot, the special symbol lottery will be executed by referring to a dedicated data table that does not specify the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot, but only the judgment value corresponding to the small win. It may be configured.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits the jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). The counter is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. At this timing, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is used to refer to the jackpot type selection table 202d to determine the jackpot type when winning the jackpot.

Here, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14. As described above, this jackpot type selection table 202d defines a random number value for determining the jackpot type in the case of winning a jackpot using the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2.

As shown in FIG. 12, the jackpot type selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 that determines the jackpot type in the normal state, and a variable/potential table 202d2 that determines the jackpot type in the variable probability state or the probability state. is included at least.

First, referring to FIG. 13, it is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal table 202d1. The normal table 202d1 is a table that is referenced when the gaming state is normal. As shown in FIG. 13, this normal table 202d1 has a plurality of types of special symbols that have won jackpots (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) and the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2. The jackpot type is specified.

Specifically, when the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 70", "jackpot A" is defined. "Jackpot B" is defined in the range "71-95", and "Jackpot C" is defined in the range "96-99". Further, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and a "jackpot D" is defined in a range where the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 99".

Here, the opening operation during the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type will be explained. In this embodiment, the contents of the opening operation (round game contents) executed according to the jackpot type, that is, the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, the opening/closing door 650f1 of the left variable winning device 650, the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, The operation contents (timing, number of times) for the opening/closing door 65f1 of the device 65 and the switching member 650h are stored in advance in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 as an opening operation scenario defined in chronological order.

Then, the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set in the case of winning a jackpot is read out and stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. When the opening operation scenario is stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario contents are updated every time the main processing (see FIG. 52) of the main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 55) that executes control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is determined and processing is executed based on the determination result.

In this way, the operation contents of each movable member during a jackpot game in which a plurality of movable members (the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the left variable winning device 65, and the switching member 650h) are moved can be controlled over time. By using the opening operation scenarios defined in series, it is possible to centrally manage the operation control for a plurality of movable members. Therefore, for example, compared to the case where each movable member is controlled separately, the operation timing of each movable member can be appropriately set, and if a problem occurs in one movable member, the other movable members can be The operation process for the movable member can be smoothly executed.

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot game in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 2 rounds, and the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened during the 2 rounds. This is the jackpot type in which the game is executed. This round game 1 is one round game in which the first attacker (left variable prize winning device) 65 is continuously opened until 10 balls win or the opening period elapses for 30 seconds. It is a round game where you

In addition, when "Jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time saving flag 203m is set on) after the end of the jackpot game, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set ( (The probability change flag 203g is set to on). That is, after the jackpot game based on "jackpot A" is executed, a variable probability state is set.

"Jackpot B" is a jackpot game in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 16 rounds, and during the 16 rounds, the jackpot game is executed in which the second attacker (right variable winning device) 650 is opened. .

In addition, when a jackpot game based on "Jackpot B" is executed, after the jackpot game ends, a low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time saving flag 203m is set to OFF), and a high probability state of the special symbol is set. (The probability change flag 203g is set to on). That is, after the jackpot game based on "jackpot B" is executed, a potential state is set. While in the potential state, the jackpot type that will be selected when the special drawing 2 game is executed and wins a jackpot will be selected with a 100% probability of being the most advantageous jackpot D, which will be described in detail later. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game, the "jackpot B" in which the probability state is set becomes a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot A".

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot game of round game 1 in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is round as a jackpot game, and the first attacker (left variable prize winning device) 65 is operated to open for two rounds. is the type of jackpot that is executed.

In addition, when a jackpot game based on "jackpot C" is executed, after the jackpot game ends, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time saving flag 203m is set to OFF), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. (The probability change flag 203g is set to on). That is, after the jackpot game based on "jackpot C" is executed, a potential state is set. Therefore, it is a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player compared to "jackpot A", and because the number of rounds is small, it is a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player when compared to "jackpot B".

In other words, if a jackpot is won by drawing the first special symbol and the normal state is set as the gaming state, there is a 71% probability that the player will win a jackpot game ("jackpot A") that is disadvantageous to the player. The game is configured so that the player will win a disadvantageous jackpot game ("jackpot B" or "jackpot C") with a probability of 29%.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot advantageous to the player is won by drawing the first special symbol, a jackpot game is executed in which the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened for two rounds, and the game is completed. If the player wins a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, a jackpot game is executed in which the second attacker (right variable winning device) 650 is opened for 16 rounds, so the type of jackpot won this time is advantageous. It is possible for a player to determine whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot during a jackpot game, but this is not limited to cases in which a player wins a jackpot that is advantageous to the player and cases where a jackpot is won that is disadvantageous to the player. In this case, a jackpot game may be executed in which the same winning device (for example, the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65) is opened.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining whether or not the type of jackpot won this time is advantageous based on the game content of the jackpot game. It is possible to predict what the game state will be set after the end of the game until just before the game state is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, as the opening operation scenario set during the jackpot game, the opening operation scenario corresponding to a jackpot that is advantageous to the player and the opening operation scenario corresponding to a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player are set for each winning device ( The contents of controlling the operation of the opening/closing doors (opening/closing door 65f1, opening/closing door 650f1) are the same so that the first attacker 65, second attacker 650) are in the open state or closed state, thereby responding to a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. The opening action scenario defines the action control content for the switching member 650h that makes it easier for the ball to pass through a specific area. The configuration may be such that the content of the motion control for the ball is defined as the content of the motion control that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area.

In addition, the operation control contents of the switching member 650h are made the same between the opening operation scenario corresponding to a jackpot that is advantageous to the player and the opening operation scenario corresponding to a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, and each winning device (first The timing for controlling the operation of the opening/closing door (opening/closing door 65f1, opening/closing door 650f1) may be different so that the attacker 65, second attacker 650) is in the open state or the closed state. By varying the length of the waiting period (opening period) from when the round game is executed until the first round game is executed, the execution timing of the round game and the operation timing of the switching member 650h are made different. Accordingly, a jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through a specific area and a jackpot game in which it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area may be implemented.

"Jackpot D" is the same jackpot game as "Jackpot B" mentioned above, so a detailed explanation of the jackpot game content will be omitted, but "Jackpot D" is selected only by lottery of the second special symbol. This is different from jackpot B in that it is the most advantageous jackpot game for the player because a probability state is set after the jackpot game of "jackpot D" ends.

As explained above, this embodiment is configured to set the gaming state that is set after the jackpot game ends, depending on the type of special symbol that won the jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to not only make players play games with the expectation of winning a jackpot, but also to make them interested in the type of special symbol that won a jackpot and the state of the game at the time of winning. can.

In this embodiment, there are four types of jackpots, but the number is not limited to this, and the number may be three or less, or five or more types may be provided. Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first winning type counter C2, different jackpot types may be selected. With this configuration, for example, by setting a jackpot type in which more rounds are executed when a jackpot is achieved with the second special symbol, it is possible for the player to win more easily with the second special symbol. It can make you look forward to it. Therefore, it is possible to make winning in the high-probability gaming state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly want to shift to the high probability state, and it is possible to make the player play the game for a longer period of time.

In addition, the type of the jackpot type selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first win type counter C2 is set to correspond to each jackpot type. It may be configured such that only the range is different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 with the aim of a specific counter value from being carried out using both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14(a), the contents defined in the variable probability/potential table 202d2 will be explained. FIG. 14(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variable/potential probability table 202d2. The variable probability/probability table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in a variable probability state or in a probability state. As shown in FIG. 14(a), this probability change/potential probability table 202d2 includes the types of special symbols that won the jackpot (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) and the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2. A plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with each other.

The variable probability/potential table 202d2 is different from the normal table 202d1 in that it is referenced when the gaming state is in the variable probability state or in the probability state, and the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol ( In the special figure 1), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined as "Jackpot A" in the range of "0 to 59", and "Jackpot B" is defined in the range of "60 to 84". ” is defined, and the difference is that “Jackpot C” is defined in the range “85 to 99”.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 in the case of a special symbol winning. 99), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated when the ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2. When the ball enters the ball, it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203, and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 202b of the RAM 203. .

The value of the small win type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, in order to determine the type of small win to be executed, the obtained value of the small win type counter C5 and the value set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 are set. The type of small win (small win game content) is determined using the small win type selection table 202g.

Here, the small hit type selection table 202g will be explained with reference to FIG. 14(b). In this small win type selection table 202g, two types of small win types are defined based on the value of the acquired small win type counter C5. Specifically, "Small win A" is defined for the acquired small win type counter value in the range of "0 to 49", and "Small win B" is defined for the range of "50 to 99". .

In this embodiment, as described above, it is configured such that a small win is won only in the second special symbol lottery. When a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol which is fluctuating at the same time is temporarily stopped, or is forcibly stopped at a missed symbol, depending on the type of the small win. are doing. Specifically, when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, if the small win type is "small win A", the first special symbol that is changing at the same time is temporarily stopped and the "small win" is selected. If it is a hit B, it is a miss and the game is forced to stop.

With this configuration, even if the first special symbol that is changing at the same time is a variation that indicates a jackpot when the special symbol 2 game is executed during the probability state, in this embodiment, the first special symbol is a variation that indicates a jackpot. 2. Since the lottery with special symbols is configured so that there is a 1/2 chance of winning a small hit, it is temporarily stopped or forced to stop when a missing symbol occurs, preventing the player from winning a disadvantageous jackpot. be able to.

Further, in this embodiment, there are two types of small winnings to be won, but there may be two or less types, or three or more types. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to provide a small winning type in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol does not stop, giving the player a more thrilling feeling, and also providing a variety of playability. can.

In addition, it is configured so that a small win can be won in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and the small win type (small win game) that differs depending on the type of special symbol winning the small win If the game is configured to set a small winning type (content), a small winning type selection table may be set so as to specify a different small winning type (small winning game content) for each type of special symbol.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines rough display modes such as so-called short time off, long time off, normal reach, super reach, etc. Determining the display mode is specifically determining the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and detailed pattern fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Incidentally, a variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 15) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is being

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e will be explained with reference to FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a normal table 202e1 used when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and a probability variation table 202e2 used when the probability variation state is set. and a potential certainty table 202e3 that is used when the potential state is set. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the data table used to select the fluctuation pattern is different depending on the gaming state, so the fluctuation pattern (variation time) to be selected is different depending on the gaming state. be able to.

Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be explained with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the normal table 202e1. This normal table 202e1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and is a data table that is used for the second special symbol with respect to the variable time set for the lottery of the first special symbol. The variable time set for the lottery is specified to be longer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is "jackpot", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 50". Various types of normal reach with a variation time of 20 seconds are defined in association with the range of , super reach A with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the range of "51 to 100," and "super reach A" with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in the range of "101 to 150." A winning super reach B with a variation time of 30 seconds is associated with the range and defined, and a winning super reach C with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the range "151 to 198".

In addition, when the lottery result is "lost" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50", a short variation time of 8 seconds is defined in association with the value of variation type counter CS1, and the variation time is in the range of "51 to 70". is defined in association with a long deviation of 12 seconds, a variation time in the range of "71 to 150" is defined in association with a deviation of 20 seconds, and a variation time in the range of "151 to 170" is defined in association with a deviation of 30 seconds. Super reach A is associated and defined, and super reach B, which has a variation time of 30 seconds, is associated and defined in the range "171 to 198".

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the fluctuation pattern for 10 minutes (600 seconds) is ignored regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. (Long hit fluctuation, long small hit fluctuation, long off fluctuation) are set.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a right-handed game is executed in a state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the ball is configured to be able to enter the second ball entry opening 640. However, as mentioned above, since a long time (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the normal state, the ball is entered into the upper first ball entry port 64b1 during the normal state. It is configured so that a game, that is, a game in which a first special symbol is drawn by lottery, is performed.

In this embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the jackpot type won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type indicates a jackpot that is advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot A). A configuration may be adopted in which different variation pattern tables are used for the case of a jackpot type and the case of a jackpot type indicating another jackpot (jackpot B). In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating another jackpot has a shorter variation than the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A). It is preferable that the configuration is such that a time variation pattern is easily selected. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the executed variation pattern, the more advantageous the player can expect a gaming result to be, making the player interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is more likely to be selected in a fluctuation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type that indicates a regular jackpot than a fluctuation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type that indicates a variable jackpot. With this, if a player wins a jackpot with a short fluctuation time, it is possible to provide a surprising gaming result to the player, and even if a short fluctuation time is selected, , can keep you looking forward to the end.

Next, the contents of the probability variation table 202e2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be explained with reference to FIG. 18(a). FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation table 202e2. As shown in FIG. 18(a), the probability variation table 202e2 defines symbol types, lottery results, value ranges of the variation type counter CS1, and variation patterns in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18(a), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is "hit (jackpot)", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is " A normal winning variation with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined in the range of ``0 to 99'', and a super winning variation with a variation time of 20 seconds is defined in the range of ``100 to 198''. In addition, in the case of "missing", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, an off-setting variation with a variation time of 8 seconds is defined for the entire range.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), a variation pattern with a variation time of 600 seconds (10 minutes) is applied regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. (Win fluctuation, small hit fluctuation, loss fluctuation) are stipulated.

As described above, during the variable probability state, a shorter variation time is set as the variation time of the second special symbol than during the normal state. Further, during the probability change state, it is configured such that it is impossible (difficult) to newly acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol. Therefore, once the state changes to a certain state, the reserved memory of the second special symbol can be used up in a short period of time.

Also, the variation times (8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds) that can be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol will all overlap with the variation time that can be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal state. By configuring and understanding the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, it may be possible to make it impossible to easily determine whether the current gaming state is a normal state or a variable probability state. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable time period may be set that allows the player to determine which gaming state is set.

Next, the contents of the potential confirmation table 202e3 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be explained with reference to FIG. 17(b). FIG. 17(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the potential confirmation table 202e3. As shown in FIG. 17(b), the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other in the potential probability table 202e3.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17(b), if the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. , If a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 minutes (long hit variation, long loss variation) is specified, and the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the lottery result of the special symbol or the obtained variation type Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 1 second (win short fluctuation, small hit short fluctuation, miss short fluctuation) are defined.

As a result, during the potential state, unlike other gaming states, the variable time corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set shorter than the variable time corresponding to the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to create a game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to execute than the lottery of the first special symbol (namely, the special symbol 2 game).

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, when a jackpot or small hit is won due to the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped or forcibly stopped. In this way, by making the first special symbol only a 10-minute variation pattern and the second special symbol only having a 1-second variation pattern during the potential state, the variation of the first special symbol is almost guaranteed. can be forcibly stopped, and it is possible to prevent the player from winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the first special symbol is configured to have only a 10-minute variation pattern, but it may be configured so that a shorter variation pattern (for example, 30 seconds) is executed. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with various gaming features, such as whether or not it is possible to prevent winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous for the player in the special figure 2 game.

Returning to FIG. 9, the explanation will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 232, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 232). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting port (through gate) 67. It is acquired when the ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The random number value for the normal symbol win is set by the second win random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second win random number counter C4 is set by the second win random number table 202c. If it matches the random number value set by , it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. In addition, this second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types: one for normal symbols with low probability, and one for high probability cases where the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than that low probability. The number of random numbers that become a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between when the probability of a normal symbol is low and when the probability of a normal symbol is high.

The contents specified in this second winning random number table 202c will be explained with reference to FIG. 11(c). FIG. 11(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined as a common symbol in the range of "0 to 10", and the probability of a normal symbol is high. In the case where the second winning random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "0 to 231", the normal winning is defined.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 232), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

The common figure variation type counter CS2 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of this common pattern variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by the value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by using the value of the acquired ordinary symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 and with reference to the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the contents stipulated in the regular figure fluctuation pattern table 202f will be explained. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the regular figure fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 18, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the variation time of 30 seconds is set when the value of the acquired common symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198". be done. Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the value of the obtained ordinary symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198", it is specified that the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set. are doing.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is configured to be varied based on the gaming state of the normal symbol and the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2, and the variation time is set. The ease with which the ball enters the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is configured to vary depending on the variable time. As a result, in each game state, it is possible to restrict the lottery act of the second special symbol that is likely to obtain a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, so it is possible to suppress excessive benefits from being given to the player. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 4, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 52) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 51). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 50) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, 2nd special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation number counter 203h, special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203i, special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203j, game state storage area 203k, time saving It has a flag 203m, a jackpot flag 203n, a special chart 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, a small winning flag 203p, a special chart 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, a special chart 2 fluctuation time counter 203s, and other memory areas 203z.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a allows balls to enter the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 (starting winning) up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on the actions taken. In addition, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning) up to the upper limit number (in this embodiment, four balls). This is a storage area for storing various counter values.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops varying and displaying, When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, this is a storage area where the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the second special symbol are stored.For details, please refer to the first special symbol holding ball execution area ( (not shown).

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are activated. The values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the variable winning type counter CS1, and the small winning type counter C5 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) upon detection of winning are respectively stored. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 (starting winning) during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28), The values of each counter C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, respectively. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), each counter C1 to C2, C5, CS1 is transferred from the counter buffer, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The values are obtained and similarly stored in each corresponding area (not shown).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the special symbol variation (lottery), in order to execute processing such as the jackpot lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, One of the data (values of counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1) corresponding to each starting prize stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b described above. The data corresponding to the starting prize is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area. Note that a shift in this embodiment refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c stores the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) upon detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (starting winning). This is a storage area where values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 inputs the value of the second winning random number counter C4 from the counter buffer. , obtains the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 and stores it in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that the data (values of counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one starting winning can be stored (held) for up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding balls are stored in the order in which they passed through the through gate 67 (starting winning), starting from the holding area in which the data is consumed earlier among the empty holding areas. .

In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the timing to start executing the fluctuating display performance of the normal symbol based on the starting winning, each counter value is stored and the winning lottery of the normal symbol is performed. It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting the display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the fluctuating display performance of the normal symbols, the MPU 201 suspends the above-mentioned normal symbols in order to execute processes such as winning lottery and setting the display of the second symbol display device 83. Among the data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the ball storage area 203c (the value of the second random number counter C4, the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to the first starting winning is stored in this normal Shift to the symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Note that a shift in this embodiment refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are detected during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. A variable display performance performed on the first symbol display device 37 (a variation performed on the third symbol display device 81 This is a counter that counts the number of pending pitches (number of times of standby) for each (display performance) up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 51). Then, each time a starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 each time the variable display performance is executed.

In addition, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (namely, the number of reserved balls) is determined based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time a starting prize is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1. It is.

In addition, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (namely, the number of reserved balls) is determined based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning). When the counter value is stored in the area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball count command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time a starting prize is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. It is.

The MPU 201 inputs each value of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer into the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). are respectively stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is transferred to the first special symbol fluctuation start process. (See S210 in FIG. 30) or in the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), perform a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determine the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. do. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display is performed under the control of the main controller 110 based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure second fluctuation pattern command and stop type command. Under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display performance based on the variable pattern and stop type notified by the variable pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f detects when a ball passes through the through gate 67 (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize winning") detected during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. ) This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of times of waiting) of variable display performed on the second symbol display device 83 up to a maximum of four times. This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 51). Then, each time a starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4 (see S2106 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol is executed (see FIG. 48, S2005).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether the current gaming state is a special symbol high probability state (probability variation state or potential probability state). When the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is a high probability state of special symbols (variable probability state or potential state), and when it is OFF, it indicates that the gaming state is a low probability state of special symbols (normal state). It shows that there is. In this embodiment, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S2706 and S2708 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when a jackpot game is started (see S813 in FIG. 34 and S1510 in FIG. 42). Note that in the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power outage occurs, the configuration is such that the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The probability variable number counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of jackpots after the jackpot game. In this embodiment, when the number of jackpot hits reaches three, the normal state is set after the third jackpot game ends, regardless of which jackpot type is won. After the end of the jackpot game, this probability change count counter 203h is incremented until the value reaches the upper limit of 2 (S2704 in FIG. 55), and when it reaches the upper limit of 2, it is reset to 0 (in FIG. 55). S2703). Note that this probability variation counter 203h is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

In this embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter is configured to be added at the end of the jackpot, but it may be added at the start of the jackpot game. Further, although the upper limit value is set to 2, the upper limit value is not limited thereto, and may be set to 2 or less, or may be set to 3 or more. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a variety of gaming features.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special figure 1, and when set to on, stops the update (subtraction) of the variable time, When the setting is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the stopped updating (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) when the lottery result is small win A (S1604 in FIG. 43), and the special symbol It is referenced in the variation process (see FIG. 29) (S202 in FIG. 29). If it is set to on in the process of S202, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in the same way as during fluctuation is executed (Fig. 29 S203). In other words, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variation display continues to be executed. Become. Thereby, by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i to ON, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has not been forcibly stopped. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol variation execution process (see FIG. 33) that it is set to ON (S701 in FIG. 33: Yes), it is set to OFF (S703 in FIG. 33).

As described above, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot, based on the fact that one of the special symbols has stopped in a combination that indicates a jackpot, depending on the jackpot type (the jackpot game is (based on execution), the process is configured to forcibly stop the fluctuating display of the other special symbol when it misses, and the fluctuating display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, based on the fact that one special symbol has stopped in a combination that indicates a small win, the fluctuating display of the other special symbol will be temporarily stopped (small win game It is configured to stop until the end of the process) or stop when it comes off.

That is, the structure is such that, depending on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various ways. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result for the player (for example, a jackpot), and while the fluctuating display to show the game result is being executed, the lottery result of the special symbol on the other side is It is possible to prevent the special symbol (the lottery result is a small win) from being displayed in a stopped state and the large win from being erased by the small win.

The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special figure 2, and when set to on, stops the update (subtraction) of the variable time, When the setting is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the stopped updating (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) when the lottery result is jackpot B (S832 in FIG. 35), and the special pattern fluctuation It is referenced in the process (see FIG. 29) (S204 in FIG. 29). If it is set to on in the process of S204, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in the same way as during fluctuation is executed (Fig. 29 S205). In other words, while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display continues to be executed. Become. Thereby, by setting the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j to ON, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 has not been forcibly stopped. Then, when it is determined in the second special symbol variation execution process (see FIG. 41) that it is set to ON (S1401 in FIG. 41: Yes), it is set to OFF (S1403 in FIG. 41).

The gaming state storage area 203k is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set gaming state, and the gaming state that is set after the end of the jackpot game (setting status of the probability change flag 203g and the time saving flag 203m). A gaming state corresponding to the game is stored. Specifically, when the variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF and the time saving flag 203m is set to OFF, the normal state is stored, and when the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON and the time saving flag 203m is set to ON, the variable state is stored. The potential state is stored when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON and the time saving flag 203m is set to OFF.

Furthermore, when a jackpot game or a small win game is being executed, the winning game state (big win state, small win state) indicating that each winning game is being executed, and the jackpot game that is being executed. The configuration is such that type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to is also stored.

Then, a status command is set based on the information stored (stored) in the gaming status storage area 203k, and the status command is output to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 receives the output status command and temporarily stores it in the slave status setting area 223k.

The information stored in this game state storage area 203k is configured so that it can be retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 51), a status command corresponding to the information stored in the gaming status storage area 203k is set.

Thereby, even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the audio lamp control device 113 can determine the current gaming state.

The time saving flag 203m is a flag for indicating a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and is set to ON when a high probability state of normal symbols is set. This time saving flag 203m is set to ON after the end of the jackpot game in accordance with the winning jackpot type (S2706 in FIG. 55). Then, if a jackpot game is won, it is set to OFF. As a result, the high probability state of the normal symbols is not set during the jackpot game, so it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, once the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol continues at least until the next jackpot is won. The configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be configured to end when a termination condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied. Specifically, if the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning a small hit), or if the lottery result is a predetermined lottery result. It may be configured such that the high probability state of the normal symbol ends when the number of times a small win (for example, a small win) reaches a predetermined number (for example, two times), or the number of drawings for each symbol lottery is The high probability state of normal symbols may be configured to end when a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) is reached.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the above-mentioned termination conditions to be different depending on the type of jackpot won and the gaming state at the time of winning. This makes it difficult for the player to predict how long the high probability state of the normal symbol will last when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

The jackpot flag 203n indicates that the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is based on the fact that a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640. This is a flag that is set on when it is determined that there is a jackpot at the start of the fluctuation. Moreover, it is set to OFF when the jackpot game ends. In addition, it is comprised of a flag that can identify which symbol corresponds to the jackpot, the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, and when it is "10", the jackpot flag 203n is set to be on for the first special symbol, and when it is "01", the jackpot flag 203n is set to be on for the second special symbol. At "00", the jackpot flag 203n is set as off.

Here, the jackpot flag 203n is configured to be able to distinguish and distinguish between the jackpot winning of the first special symbol and the jackpot winning of the second special symbol, so that when the special symbol fluctuation starts, the jackpot winning of the first special symbol and the jackpot winning of the second special symbol are distinguishable. If one of the second special symbols is set to ON first, even if the other lottery result becomes a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203n corresponding to the jackpot of each special symbol is set to ON. .

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and both special symbols can be used to win the jackpot. If you win, a jackpot game will be executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol fluctuation was stopped first (determined display of the special symbol), and the special symbol fluctuation is stopped first (determined display of the special symbol). ), depending on the jackpot type, the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a loss.

With this configuration, in a pachinko machine 10 that can execute drawings of multiple special symbol types at the same time (in parallel), a jackpot may be won in the drawing of each special symbol, and players may receive an excessive amount of money at the same time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege (jackpot game) is awarded.

Furthermore, even if a player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player in one special symbol lottery, by the time the winning result is stopped (confirmed display), a jackpot that is advantageous to the player has been won in the other special symbol lottery. It is possible to win. In this case, it is preferable to use the variable time until the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed to perform a variable effect that suggests to the player that he or she has won an unfavorable win. As a result, the player can be made to think that he or she has won at a disadvantage, so that the other player can be motivated to carry out the special symbol lottery during the variable time.

In addition, the configuration may be such that a short variable time is more likely to be set when a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won than when a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won. As a result, while one special symbol that won an unfavorable win is fluctuating, it is possible to win an advantageous win in the other special symbol lottery, and the winning result can be stopped and displayed (confirmed display) before the unfavorable winning result. can.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203n is used which can separately store the lottery result (winning) of the first special symbol and the lottery result (winning winning) of the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a common jackpot flag is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and if a jackpot is won in one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot flag 203n is turned on. , and the other special symbol lottery executed with the jackpot flag 203n set to on may be configured so that no jackpot is won.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is a flag indicating that the first special symbol jackpot A or jackpot C is executed while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. This is set to ON when a jackpot of the first special symbol is executed. This special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON in S805 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S209 in FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, in the process of S902 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S212 in FIG. 36), it is set to OFF.

As a result, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol, which was forced to stop and display as a missed symbol, is prevented from executing the lottery again. be able to.

In addition, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, within one special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33), after executing the process related to the first special symbol, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. By configuring this to be executed, the variation processing for each special symbol can be executed without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 33), when any special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, the jackpot control processing is performed in the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52). (S2404 in FIG. 53) is configured to be executed. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29) is performed when the current state is a jackpot or small win (S201 in FIG. 29: Yes), the special symbol variation process (S204 to S213 in FIG. 29) is configured to skip.

In other words, in this embodiment, while a jackpot game or a small win game is being executed based on the special symbol lottery result, a new special symbol variation (lottery) is not executed. When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode to indicate that the lottery result is a jackpot due to the variation process for the first special symbol that is executed first in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29). Then, within the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29), a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed.

In this embodiment configured in this way, by using the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode to indicate that the lottery result is a jackpot, It can be suppressed that a new variation process for the second special symbol is executed within the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29).

The small hit flag 203p is a flag indicating that the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a small win, and is set to ON when the small win is won. This small hit flag 203p is set to ON when the judgment result of the second special symbol is a small win (see S1102 in FIG. 38), and when the special symbol fluctuation whose winning result is a small win is stopped and displayed. (See S1608 in FIG. 43).

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is a counter for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 32). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S511 in FIG. 32). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation execution process (see S207 in FIG. 33) is executed, and whether the value is 0 or not in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29). is determined (see S208 in FIG. 29). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 (S208 in FIG. 29: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process ( (See S209 in FIG. 34) is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (see S1653 in FIG. 44). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss while the second special symbol is displayed as a jackpot, the value of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time counter 203r remains, and the After the stop display, it can be suppressed that the variation of the first special symbol is restarted again based on the value left in the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203s.

The special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is a counter for measuring the variation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S906 in FIG. 39). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S1210 in FIG. 39). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation execution process (see S213 in FIG. 41) is executed, and whether the value is 0 or not in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29). is determined (see S212 in FIG. 29). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is 0 (S212 in FIG. 29: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process ( (See S213 in FIG. 42) is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special symbol 2 variable time counter 203s is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (see S808 in FIG. 34). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss when the first special symbol is displayed as a jackpot, the value of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203s remains, and the value of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203s remains. After the stop display, it can be suppressed that the variation of the second special symbol is restarted based on the value left in the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203s.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, etc. are set (stored).

Returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a. A large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side as a shaft, a V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650, and a switching member 650h provided in the right variable winning device 650. A solenoid 209 consisting of a flow path solenoid 650k for driving a motor, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory (other solenoids 209z), etc. is connected, and the MPU 201 issues various commands and controls to these through an input/output port 205. Send a signal.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc. (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 receives output from the various switches 208. and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 50) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed at the time of super reach. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls the display of error commands including the type of error. to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and a restart fluctuation pattern selection table 222b.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each type of variation pattern (too far, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The audio lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the validity determination result, and the acquired selection counter value. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing general information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress the problem of players getting bored of the game early.

The restart variation pattern selection table 222b selects "remaining time A", "remaining time B", and "remaining time C" from the remaining time information storage area when a command indicating the restart of a temporarily stopped special symbol is received. A detailed restart variation pattern is selected based on the stored remaining time. As a result, by reselecting the resumed variable pattern as the temporarily stopped variable pattern, it is possible to provide a game that feels more natural.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 20(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. , special figure 1 variation start flag 223e, special figure 2 variation start flag 223f, special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, right hit flag 223j, slave state setting area 223k, special figure 1 temporary At least a stop flag 223m, a special map 2 temporary stop flag 223n, a remaining time information storage area 223p, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 59) of the voice ramp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command is read out by the command determination process. , the command is analyzed, and processing is performed according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each of these areas has , winning information is stored respectively. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223b allows the audio lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of reserved balls and the like before the fluctuation starts.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, is used for the variable performance ( This is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance held in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. It looks like this.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, if the number of held balls in the variable display is added due to the ball entering the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2, or the main control device When the variable display in the special symbol is executed in step 110 and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of reserved balls command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is sent to the voice lamp control device. Send to 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the held ball number command. , is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the first special symbol of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number of reserved pitches counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and also stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved number counter 223c. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the pitch number counter 223c, a command for the number of reserved pitches for display is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls for display, the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved. Image drawing is controlled so that the number of pitches is displayed in the small area Dm1a (see FIG. 6(a)) of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in the potential state and this display reserved ball number command is received, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number is displayed in the small display area Dm4a to small display area Dm4e. The display is controlled to be lit accordingly. With this configuration, the value of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol in the potential state can be more clearly communicated to the player.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d calculates the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c based on a reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The only difference is that the data is stored in the memory, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 variation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when receiving the special figure 1 variation pattern command that notifies the variation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110. is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display setting on the third symbol display device 81 is made.

The special figure 2 variation start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when receiving the special figure 2 variation pattern command that notifies the variation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110. is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display setting on the third symbol display device 81 is made.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when receiving the first stop type command that notifies the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display setting on the third symbol display device 81 is made.

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when receiving the second stop type command that notifies the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display setting on the third symbol display device 81 is made.

The right-handed flag 223j is set to ON when the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 1 or more when a jackpot ending command is received. On the other hand, if a pending pitch count command is received during the potential state and it is determined that the value is 0, it is set to OFF.

In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set. The audio lamp control device 113 can also determine the current gaming state based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223k. The state setting command is also output from the main control device 110 when the power is turned on, so that the backed up gaming state can be determined by the audio lamp control device 113.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 223m is a flag indicating whether the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, and is set to ON when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 1 restart command is issued. It is set to off when received.

The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 223n is a flag indicating whether the fluctuation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and is set to on when the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 2 restart command is issued. It is set to off when received.

The remaining time information storage area 223p is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining time of the variation of the special symbol to be temporarily stopped. In this remaining time information storage area 223p, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special symbol fluctuation display is set, and the remaining period information (period A to period C) is set to indicate the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special symbol fluctuation display. The stored remaining period information is referred to when setting the restart effect when restarting.

The dash end flag 223q is a flag to indicate that the number of pending balls of the first special symbol remaining when the potential state is set becomes 0 and the dash mode ends, and the dash mode ends. This is set to ON when the pitch count command is a command indicating 0. On the other hand, when a command to confirm the change is received, it is set to off.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and displays a variable display (fluctuation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. This controls the performance (performance) and preview performance. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 50).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. A process of transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and a process of transferring data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying the address to outputting the data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) that is executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the image in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, while NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 114 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until the third symbol display device 81 displays any image.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and the processing can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, the power-on variation image area 235b is displayed when the player starts a game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the ball entrance 64b2 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 shows the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image area 235a as shown in FIG. 22(a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the command as shown in FIG. 22(b). As shown in FIG. 22(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, there is a power-on fluctuation image with a "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and as shown in FIG. 22(c), a "○" A power-on variation image of an "x" symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the symbol during the variation period. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery held in the main control device 110 is determined. The result is judged, and if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in Figure 22 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in Figure 22 (c) is displayed. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can be done.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is detected. 22B, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 22(b) and 22(c) are drawn. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to alternately display the images on the third symbol display device 81. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball entering the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. It can be immediately displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 21, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 23(b) shows back surfaces B to D corresponding to "forest stage," "river stage," and "sky stage," respectively, with respect to rear surface A corresponding to "city stage". . Moreover, FIG. 24 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 23, the back images corresponding to the back faces A to D are all images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each of the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at position a and position c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a connected manner.

When it is decided to change the back type based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 , First, a position between position a and position a' of the corresponding back image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at that initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Then, as time passes, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scrolling image, and the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches an image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, images between positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24, the back image on the back surface E changes to the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→... in FIG. 24 over time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back E is a third pattern in which an image of the mountain towering over the island, an image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in fixed positions. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of an image of the sky above a mountain changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 24(a) is displayed as the initial back image of the back surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24(a), an orange sky representing morning glow is displayed. Then, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined period of time, the back image shown in FIG. 24(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24(b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined period of time, the back image shown in FIG. 24(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 24(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then to orange. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 24(a) is returned to, and the back images shown in FIGS. 24(a) to 24(c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be explained. As shown in FIG. 23(a), the back surface A corresponding to the town stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to positions a to d are stored in the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage with the initial stage "Town Stage" displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the "Town Stage" that is frequently displayed is By making all the data reside permanently in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load placed on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are partial areas of the back surface, as shown in FIG. 23(b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In addition, the image data corresponding to the back surface images between FIGS. 24(a) and 24(b) including FIG. 24(a) and excluding FIG. During the start-up process, the image data is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and becomes resident.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to have the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235; Therefore, it is necessary to use a RAM with a very large capacity, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, when the stage is changed, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first is set in the range from position a to position a' (or in the range shown in FIGS. 24(a) to 24(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 24(a) and 24(b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, when a stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or color tone can be changed as time passes. It can be displayed while Furthermore, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, for rear surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from position a to position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back surface E, the images shown in FIGS. 24(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 24(b) to 24(c) and 24(c) to 24(a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range from (b) to (b) is set. As a result, while the images in FIGS. 24(a) to (b) are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images in FIGS. 24(b) to (c) and 24(c) to (a) can be Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 24(a) and 24(b) can be displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 24(b) to 24(c) and 24(c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes. be able to.

Note that on the rear surfaces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 21) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the back image data stored in the subarea dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so the back image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. Duplicate image data is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from position b' on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image can be scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, then, The MPU 231 uses the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display images between positions a to c that are scrolled repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 21, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" as the third symbol is resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable production, the third symbol display device It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variable performance is not started immediately in step 81.

In addition, the third symbol area 235d includes main symbols that are not numbered from "0" to "9" and include a main symbol consisting of a backward symbol such as a wooden box, a backward symbol and a character such as a plane, a wrapping cloth, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of an auxiliary pattern imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with a winning start does not start even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable effect stopped. It will be done. As a result, when the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses the resident image data. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character pattern area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in the error message image area 235f in advance, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, a process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read out in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for rendering processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a storage image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, opening presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , round performance, ending performance, and demo performance are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss is finally displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

The opening performance is a performance to inform the player that the pachinko machine 10 will now move to a special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened.The round performance will start from now on. This is an effect to notify the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending performance is a performance for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to an opening performance, a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. Note that if the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image is displayed on the back side of the sprite. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2,...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite is defined for each address, such as effects for expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, etc. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. This back type is the back side A to E that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of the "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display any one of the images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, in the case of specifying that a back image different from back surfaces A to E is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed based on the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as the drawing target, Furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81), depending on the back type. Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information by the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuating performance that is being performed this time, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the last address of the display data table (in the example of FIG. 25) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is written. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the process of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as mentioned above, the transfer data table is the one that is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the normal video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 26). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 26 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 26, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 26, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 22(a) to 22(c) on the third symbol display device 81. This is a flag to indicate. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is generated that describes the contents of the image drawing instructions for the image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and displays the image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 75(b ), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 27), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and acquires the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2,...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2,..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite such as a pattern) is described for that sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and the resulting image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 uses the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to display the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 adjusts the image data according to the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also specifies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and the character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (Character 1, Character 2, . . . , Pending pitch number symbol 1, Pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 75(b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j indicates a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 75(b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's image and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of images in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of images.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When this back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and when it is off, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referenced in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). Thereby, it is possible to display a back image corresponding to the back image change command or production mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each bit is associated with each back surface type. If any bit of this back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the turned on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. In this rear image discrimination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 81(a) ), see S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to OFF. This back image discrimination flag 233x allows the currently set back type to be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration performance is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that a demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that a demonstration is not being performed. This demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demo display data table When a display data table other than the above is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to off (S6505 in FIG. 77(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b) , see S6905 in FIG. 79). This demonstration display flag 233y makes it possible to easily determine whether or not a demonstration is currently being performed.

The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the final display performance refers to a performance in which the stopped symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) (determined display) after the fluctuating pattern. If this final display flag 233z is on, it means that a final display performance is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a final display performance is not in progress. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and when the fixed display data table is It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b), 79, S6905). With this confirmed display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not a confirmed display performance is currently being performed.

<About the control process executed by the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 56. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second winning random number counter C4, and the small winning type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second winning random number counter C4, and the small winning type counter C5 are each incremented by 1, and when those counter values reach the maximum When the values (in this embodiment, 479, 99, 239, 232, and 99, respectively) are reached, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed, which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). Thereafter, a starting winning process is executed when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting winning) or a ball enters the second ball entering port 640 (starting winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 to 45.

After executing the starting winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through gate as the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is executed. Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. After executing the through gate passage process, the firing control process is then executed (S108), and other processes that should be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether or not to fire. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104) performs various judgments (validity judgment) and decisions on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on each acquired counter value, and performs the determination by predetermined control. In the variable display mode that has been set, various commands are issued to control the first symbol display device 37 to enable variable display, and to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute variable display performances of the third and fourth symbols. Control is executed to set and stop display in a display mode that shows the determination result (appropriate determination result). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), first, it is determined whether the game is in a jackpot game (during jackpot) or a small win game (during small win) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203k, it is determined whether the current game is a big winning game (during a jackpot) or a small winning game (during a small winning).

In the process of S201, if it is determined that the jackpot or small win is in progress (S201: Yes), then it is determined whether the special map 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to on (S202), and the flag is turned on. If it is determined that it has been set (S202: Yes), the display on the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special symbol is updated (S203), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S202, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is not set to on (S202: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to on ( S204). If it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to on (S204: Yes), the display on the first symbol display device corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated (S205), This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is not on (that is, it is off), (S204: No), this process is directly ended.

Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) in a display mode indicating winning of the small hit A. In this embodiment, while the small winning A game is being executed, the variable time set in the variable display (special pattern variable display) for showing the lottery results of special symbols is configured not to be updated (subtracted). During this period, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode to indicate that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

Moreover, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to ON when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning of jackpot B. In this embodiment, while the jackpot B is set, the variation time of the first special symbol is not updated, and during that period, the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. It is configured so that the aspect is not updated.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the fluctuating display of the special symbols that was being executed with the start of the small win game or the jackpot game has been temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful if the special symbol variation being executed disappears. In addition, as a display mode to show that the fluctuating display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display format to show that the fluctuating display is in progress (for example, lighting at 0.2 second intervals, The display mode may be the same as the blinking display mode in which the light is repeatedly turned off), or the display mode may be the same as the display mode in which the blinking interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that the light is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (for example, the light is turned on and off repeatedly at 0.5 second intervals). A blinking display mode) may also be used. Furthermore, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be able to display a display mode of multiple colors, a blinking display mode using a special color that can be displayed only when the temporary stop is being performed is used. Also good.

On the other hand, in the process of S201, if it is determined that the current time is not a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0, that is, the first It is determined whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S206). If it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r is greater than 0) (S206: Yes), the first special symbol variation in progress process is executed ( S207).

In this first special symbol variation execution process (S207), in order to vary (update) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 during the period in which the first special symbol is varying. processing is executed. When the process of S207 is finished, next, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r updated in the first special symbol variation execution process (S207) is 0 (S208), If it is determined in the process that the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r is 0 (S208: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S209), and the process proceeds to S211, which will be described later.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S209), when the fluctuation time specified for the first special symbol that is being fluctuated and displayed has elapsed, the fluctuating display is stopped at a symbol that indicates the lottery result of the first special symbol. is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the second special symbol that is being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss. is executed. Furthermore, if the second special symbol being executed has won a jackpot, a process for erasing information regarding the jackpot is executed. Details of this first special symbol variation stop processing (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. If it is determined in the process of S208 that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is not 0 (S208: No), the process of S209 is skipped and the process proceeds to S211.

On the other hand, in the process of S206, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S206: No), that is, if it is determined that the current time is not during the special figure 1 fluctuation. Next, executes a first special symbol variation start process (S210). In this first special symbol variation start process (S210), processing for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and the state is such that a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If the state is such that a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. This first special symbol variation start process (S210) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32.

After executing the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S210), after determining that the special symbol 1 is fluctuating in the process of S208 (S208: No), or after executing the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207). After the execution, next, the variation processing regarding the second special symbol (S211 to S215) is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is greater than 0 (S211). That is, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined in the process of S211 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S211: No), this means that the current time is not during the special figure 2 fluctuation, so the next Then, a second special symbol variation start process is executed to execute a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (S212), and this process ends.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S212), if pending data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol pending ball number storage area 203b, jackpot determination and variation pattern selection based on the pending data Processing is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation start process (S212), when the lottery result is a jackpot (or a small jackpot), the jackpot flag 203n (or the small jackpot flag 203p) is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the process of S211, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0, that is, the special figure 2 is currently changing (S211: Yes), then the second A special symbol variation execution process is executed (S213). The contents of this second special symbol variation execution process (S213) will be described later with reference to FIG. is executed by changing from the first special symbol to the second special symbol.

When the second special symbol variation execution process (S213) is finished, it is determined whether the current value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203s is 0 (S214), and if it is determined to be 0 (S214). :Yes), executes the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S215), and then ends this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S214 that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is not 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and this process is ended.

The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the variable time has elapsed, a process is executed to stop the variable display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. In addition, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the first special symbol fluctuation that is being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss. Processing is executed. Further, if the second special symbol being executed has won a jackpot, a process for erasing information regarding the jackpot is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since the configuration is such that a small win can be won in the second special symbol lottery, if the second special symbol lottery result is not a jackpot, it can be handled as a small win or a loss. The specified processing is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 29, in this embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In, it is configured to execute the fluctuation processing regarding the first special symbol (S206 to S210) and the fluctuation processing regarding the second special symbol (S211 to S215) within one special symbol fluctuation processing. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (variation) for each special symbol, the variation process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Moreover, in this embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed earlier (with priority) than the variation process regarding the second special symbol. In this way, by clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol, even if the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol and the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, priority will be given to the first special symbol. 1 Special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation processing regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation processing regarding the second special symbol The processing may be configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the first special symbol.

Furthermore, it may be configured to give priority to execution of variation processing for a special symbol type in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set gaming state, and the player If the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol types in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol types in which the variation process is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a lottery result that is advantageous to the player from being canceled (discarded) by a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the first special symbol variation start process (S210), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation start process (S210).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S210 in FIG. 30), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the value of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is It is determined whether the value (N1) is greater than 0 (S302). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S303 ).

Then, a held ball number command indicating the number of held balls after subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in holding areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol held ball number storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A process of sequentially shifting to the side is performed (S305). More specifically, data in each area is shifted in the following order: reservation area 1 → execution area, reservation area 2 → reservation area 1, reservation area 3 → reservation area 2, reservation area 4 → reservation area 3.

Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) will be described in detail later, but using the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), Based on the set gaming state, a jackpot determination is performed as to whether or not it is a jackpot.

Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S307) will be described in detail later, but is based on the result of the validity determination based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30), will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, in order to determine whether the current gaming state is a special symbol high probability state (probability variable state, potential probability state), it is determined whether the probability variable flag 203g is set to on (S402). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, the special symbol is in a high probability state) (S402: Yes), based on the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 11(a)), S401 It is determined whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process matches the jackpot determination value in the high probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S403).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S402: No), the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 171a)) is It is determined whether the value of the 1-hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value in the low probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S404).

After completing the process of S403 or S404, it is next determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (S405), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S405: Yes), the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is determined. As shown, the jackpot flag 203n is set on (S406). In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203n is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of special symbol winning the jackpot in addition to information indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot winning. It is configured such that information indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the process of S406, information indicating a jackpot is set for the area corresponding to the first special symbol in the jackpot flag 203n.

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S407), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired winning type counter C2 (S407). S408), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S405 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S405: No), a missing symbol of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S409), and this process ends. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 32), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot. It is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203n is on for the first special symbol. This jackpot flag 203n is set to ON in the process of S406 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) described above.

When it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot (S501: Yes), it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on (S502). That is, it is determined whether the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). The probability change flag 203g is turned on in order to set the probability change state after the jackpot ends when it is determined that the won jackpot type is jackpot A in the process of S2705 of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 55) (S2705: Yes). It is set to . Then, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is off (S502: Yes), the current gaming state is the normal state, so the time saving flag 203m is obtained from the normal jackpot type selection table 202d1. Based on the first winning type counter CS2, the current jackpot type is determined (S503). On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is on (S502: Yes), based on the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 from the probability variable jackpot type selection table 202d2, The current jackpot type is determined (S504). On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (that is, the jackpot flag 203n is off), there is no need to determine the jackpot type, so the processes of S502 to S504 are skipped. , the process moves to S505.

In this embodiment, as described above, the type of jackpot to be won is set to be different based on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, so the player is always excited to play the game to see which jackpot type he will win. It can be carried out. In this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined based on the gaming state, but the jackpot type is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be determined based on the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the jackpot.

After the processing of any one of S501, S503, and S504 is completed, next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is obtained (S505), and the value is stored in the gaming state storage area 203k. The variable pattern selection table 202e corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, latent state, variable probability state) corresponding to the information is read out (S506).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S505 and the variation pattern selection table 202e read out in the process of S506 (S507), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S507. Then, a special figure 1 variation pattern command is set (S508).

Next, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S509), a fluctuation start of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S510), and the selected fluctuation pattern is set. A value indicating the variation time of is set to the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r (S511), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation execution process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 28), will be explained. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation execution process (S207). In this first special symbol variation execution process (S205), there is a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation that is being executed, and a special symbol that was interrupted due to winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. Processing for restarting symbol variation is executed.

In the first special symbol variation execution process (S205), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to on. This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, if a small hit is won with one special symbol, the small win type is small win A, and the other special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the other special symbol fluctuation is displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to suspend (the period from winning the small winning to ending the small winning game) and resume the other special symbol fluctuation after a predetermined period has passed (after the small winning game ends). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special symbol variation of one from ending during the small winning game of the other, resulting in a game that is difficult for the player to understand. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since it is configured such that whether the fluctuation of the other special symbol is interrupted or discarded is determined depending on the winning type of small winning. You can enjoy the game while being excited.

In the process of S701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON (S701: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set to Set to off (S703), subtract 1 from the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r (S704), update the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S705), and end this process. .

In this embodiment, the first special symbol variation execution process ( (See S205 in FIG. 31), and the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r is updated (subtracted by 1) in the first special symbol variation execution process (see S207 in FIG. 32). It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, if a variation time of 30 seconds is set as the variation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r, and the value changes by 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured so that it is subtracted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S701 that the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203i is not set to ON (S701: No), that is, if it is determined that the small hit has not been won in the second special symbol lottery. , the process skips steps S702 and S703 and proceeds to step S704.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the first special symbol variation stop process (S209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation stop processing (S209). This first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) is performed when it is determined that the current value of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is "0", that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is This is a process that is executed when the time period has elapsed.

When the first special symbol variation stop process (S209 in FIG. 34) is executed, it is first determined whether the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S801). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is set on for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), then it is determined whether the jackpot type won this time is jackpot A or jackpot C. (S802). If it is determined that the jackpot type is not A or C (S802: No), special map 2 temporary stop processing (S803) is executed, and the process moves to S812.

Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803), which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S209 in FIG. 34), will be explained. In this special figure 2 temporary stop processing (S803), when executing the process of stopping the variation of the first special symbol, and when the variation result is jackpot B, the procedure for interrupting the variation of the second special symbol is performed. Execute processing.

In the special figure 2 temporary stop process (S803), first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a value greater than 0, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is changing (S831). If it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203s is not a value greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S831: No), it is necessary to interrupt (temporarily stop) the variation of the second special symbol. Since there is no such file, this process ends immediately.

On the other hand, in the process of S831, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S831: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to on (S832). , sets a special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is turned on (S833), and ends this process.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot B is won due to the variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted), and the second special symbol is restarted again after the jackpot game ends. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a game that arouses the player's interest in determining whether the current jackpot type is interrupted by fluctuation of the second special symbol or forcibly stopped by a miss. In addition, in this embodiment, the variation of the second special symbol is configured to be temporarily stopped when jackpot B is won, but the structure is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be temporarily stopped when a specific result is achieved. good. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the thrill of not knowing when the other special symbol will be temporarily stopped.

Returning to FIG. 34, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S802, if it is determined that the jackpot type won this time is jackpot A or jackpot C (S802: Yes), a process for forcibly stopping the variation of the second special symbol is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is a value greater than 0 (S804). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s is greater than 0 (S804: Yes), the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S805), and the special figure 2 variation stop flag is set to ON. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that 203o is turned on is set (S806).

Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (S807), and the value of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is set to 0 (S808). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a jackpot, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) that is being executed is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss (missing symbol). (confirmed display).

After completing the process of S808, it is next determined whether the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol is set on (S809), and if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is set on (S809: Yes), the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol is turned off in order to apply the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol that was forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss in the process of S807 described above. settings (S810), deletes the stored information regarding the special drawing 2 jackpot (S811), and moves to the process of S812. On the other hand, in the process of S809, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the processes of S810 and 811 are skipped and the process moves to the process of S812.

In the process of S812, first, a jackpot scenario won by this special symbol variation is set (S812), and then the jackpot flag 202u, probability variable flag 203g, and time saving flag 203m corresponding to the first special symbol are set to off ( S813), information indicating that the current gaming state is a jackpot (jackpot game in progress) is stored in the gaming state storage area 203k (S814). The gaming state storage area 203k is configured to be able to separately store the gaming states related to lottery games (normal state, variable probability state, potential state) and the gaming states related to winning games (mid-big win, mid-small win). By executing the process of S811, the gaming state (normal state, variable probability state, potential state) related to the lottery game at the timing of winning the jackpot and the gaming state indicating that the jackpot is in progress are stored. .

With this configuration, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine the gaming state that was set at the timing when the jackpot was won.

After completing the process of S814, next, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol (S815), and the first special symbol display device A process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner in step 37 (S816), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is not set on for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processes of S802 to S814 are skipped, and the process of S815 described above is performed. Move to processing.

As described above, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209), the processing (S812 to S816) of stopping the fluctuation display at the symbol indicating the lottery (first lottery game) result of the first special symbol is executed. Further, if the current lottery result is a jackpot (S801: Yes), the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result becomes a loss (S807). In this way, in the process of stopping and displaying one special symbol (determined display) with the symbol indicating a jackpot, by configuring the process to forcibly stop the other special symbol that is fluctuating, it is possible to simultaneously Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol variations to be executed.

In other words, in a configuration in which, like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation processing regarding the first special symbol and the variation processing regarding the second special symbol are sequentially executed, the fluctuation processing is executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By executing the variation process (forced stop process) of the second special symbol within the variation process related to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at a timing when the variation process related to the second special symbol is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the second special symbol from being duplicated and to execute the processing smoothly.

In addition, in this embodiment, at the timing when one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a jackpot, a process is executed to forcibly stop the other special symbol as a symbol indicating a loss. For example, if it is determined that one of the special symbols has won a jackpot, that is, if it is determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) that the current lottery result is a jackpot ( In S405: Yes in FIG. 31, the variation of the other special symbol may be forcibly stopped at the missed symbol. In this case, it is preferable to perform a special variation that does not result in a jackpot for the other special symbol that has been forcibly missed and stopped until the jackpot variation of one special symbol ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that when one special symbol wins a jackpot, the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the other special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and to prevent the player from knowing whether or not a jackpot has been won.

In addition, when controlling the fluctuation of the other special symbol being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the content of the fluctuation control is configured to be different depending on the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. For example, if the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol and is stopped and displayed, and the second special symbol is fluctuating to indicate that the lottery is a loss (loss fluctuation), that lottery During the fluctuation (winning fluctuation) to discard the result and forcibly stop the fluctuation to show that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit (big hit, small win) In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol ends, an interruption process may be executed so that the variation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

In this case, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol ends, the player is kept interested in whether a new second special symbol variation will be executed or whether the suspended second special symbol variation will be restarted. You can play games. Furthermore, when such a configuration is used, the system is configured to execute a suggestion performance for suggesting to the player the status of the second special symbol (whether or not it is suspended) during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. That's good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the second special symbol variation start process (S212), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 29), will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation start process (S212).

When the second special symbol variation start process (S212) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901). That is, the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31) that was executed immediately before this process (within the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29)) )) to determine whether or not you won the jackpot.

In the process of S901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to on (S901: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to OFF (S902), and this processing ends. That is, in this embodiment, by using the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the second After a special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with a removed symbol, a new second special symbol variation is prohibited from being executed. Thereby, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed during the variation process related to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing any problems.

In this embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S901 that the special map 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901: Yes), the special map 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to OFF. Therefore, by setting the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o, the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) can be skipped only once.

This is the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol If you skip the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) that is executed immediately after winning the jackpot in the jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31), then the first special symbol jackpot The jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (jackpot scenario) set in the determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31), and the jackpot game is ended by the process in S201 of the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 29). This is because the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) is configured not to be executed until the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation process of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of one special symbol, so that the control process executed by the main controller 110 The processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped and displayed on a missed symbol), and one special symbol is stopped and displayed. In order to prevent a new variation (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed until a jackpot game based on the lottery result of the symbol is executed, the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o is set and the variation processing of the other special symbol is performed. Although a configuration in which the process is skipped once is used, other configurations may be used.

In other words, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (jackpot win), the jackpot will not be won in the other special symbol lottery (variation) until the jackpot game based on the jackpot win ends. For example, when a jackpot control process (see S2512 in FIG. 53) for executing a jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110, which will be described later, the special figure 2 The configuration may be such that the fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to OFF.

With this configuration, even if the timing to turn on the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set before the timing at which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the timing for turning on the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set before the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, until the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit a new variation (lottery) of the second special symbol from being performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation start process (see S212 in FIG. 36) is executed with the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o set to on, the variation of the second special symbol Although the configuration is such that the process is skipped, that is, a new variation is not started (the second special symbol remains stopped), the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o is turned on. If set, a variable display of a dedicated second special symbol may be performed.

In this case, the second special symbol is drawn using a special lottery that does not win a jackpot, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed for a period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. It may be configured, or the period until the jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol without executing the lottery of the second special symbol, or the period until reaching a specific timing during the jackpot game. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner until the end of the jackpot game. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

In addition, the content of the variation process regarding each special symbol mentioned above is configured to be outputted to the audio lamp control device 113 side as appropriate by setting a command indicating the content, and the third symbol display device The variable display of the third and fourth symbols displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is being forcibly stopped, the voice lamp control device 113 side receives a command indicating that the second special symbol has been forcibly stopped and displayed. In this case, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the fourth symbol is used to execute the variable production during the forced stop. Also good.

In this way, each symbol (third symbol, fourth symbol) that is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol on the third symbol display device 81, which is easily visible to the player, is used to display the actual second special symbol. Even when the variation performance is configured to be executed while the symbols are forcibly stopped, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

In the process of S901, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol and is not displayed in a stopped state (S901: No), then the processing is performed in S903 to S909. Execute the process and end this process. The processing from S903 to S909 is performed by the first special symbol reservation ball counter 203d, the first special symbol reservation The value of the ball number counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S307), the second special symbol reserved ball number The counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S909) Since they are the same except for the changes, their explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908). This second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908) is different from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) in that the type of target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. , and added some other processing.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 37) differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 31) described above in the following points. That is, in the process of S1001 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) was changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and S406 to S408 In the process of S1006 to S1008 corresponding to the process, the target was changed from special pattern 1 (first special pattern) to special pattern 2 (second special pattern), and if the lottery result of the special pattern was a loss. The difference is that the processing to be executed has been changed. Since the other points are the same, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 37), if it is determined that the current lottery is not a jackpot (S1005: No), the special symbol 2 loss variation process is executed (S1009) and this process ends. do.

This special symbol 2 loss variation process (S1009) is a process that is executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than a big hit, that is, a small hit or a loss. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 37, but if the lottery result is a loss, a process similar to the process in S409 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35) described above is executed, If the lottery result is a small win, processing corresponding to the small win is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the contents of the special figure 2 off variation process (S1009) will be explained. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 off variation processing (S1009).

In the special symbol 2 out-of-win variation process (S1009), first, check whether the current lottery result (the lottery result obtained in the process of S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S905 in FIG. 36)) is a small hit. (S1101).

If it is determined that the small win has been won in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), the small win flag 203x is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a small win (S1103). ), then sets the small winning symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is a miss (S1101: No), the miss symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is is set (S1105), and this processing ends.

As explained above, the special symbol 2 off variation process (S1009 in FIG. 38), which is executed as one process of the second special symbol variation start process (see S212 in FIG. 36), that is, the special symbol variation (lottery) By setting the small hit flag 203x on when it is determined that a small hit has been won in the process executed at the timing when the second special symbol starts changing, the setting status of the small win flag 203x is determined at the timing when the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops. Based on this, it is possible to easily execute processing corresponding to a small winning win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 39) differs from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 32) described above in the following points. In the process of S901 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S506 to S507 Each of the processes of S906 to S907 corresponding to each process is different in that the special figure 1 variation pattern command (the first special symbol variation pattern command) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the special symbol 2 off variation pattern executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) The contents of the selection process (S1207 in FIG. 40) will be explained.

When the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S1301). In the process of S1301, determination is performed based on the lottery result obtained in the process of S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S908 in FIG. 37).

In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S1301: Yes), then the value of the small win type counter C5 is acquired (S1302), and the value of the acquired small win type counter C5 is A small winning type is selected based on the value (S1303). In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since there is only one type of small win, a different small win type is not set based on the value of the acquired small win type counter C5, but for example, a plurality of small win types are not set. If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set the small win type, a small win type selection table is provided in which different small win types are defined for the value range of the acquired small win type counter C5, and S1302 and S1303 The configuration may be such that different small winning types are selected depending on the processing.

After completing the process of S1303, next, the fluctuation pattern selection table according to the current gaming state is read out (S1304), and the small winning pattern is selected based on the read fluctuation pattern selection table and the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. A variation pattern (small winning variation pattern) is selected (S1305). Then, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the small winning variation pattern selected in the process of S1305 is set (S1306), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1301 that the current lottery result is not a small win (a loss) (S1301: No), the process for the case where the lottery result is a loss is executed (S1307 to S1309). In the process of S1307, first, the variation pattern selection table according to the gaming state is read out (S1307), a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the obtained variation type counter CS2 (S1308), and a special variation pattern is selected based on the selected variation pattern. The variation pattern command shown in FIG. 2 is set (S1309), and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the contents of the second special symbol variation execution process (S213), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 28), will be explained. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation execution process (S213). A process for updating the variation of the second special symbol is executed, and when the variation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, a process for restarting the variation is executed.

In the second special symbol variation execution process (S213), it is first determined whether the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203j is on (S1401). If it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is on, that is, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S1401: Yes), the special figure 2 for restarting the fluctuation of the second special symbol A restart command is set (S1402), the special map 2 temporary stop flag 203j is set to OFF (S1403), and the process moves to S1404. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203j is not on (S1401: No), since the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped, the process moves to S1404.

After executing the process of S1401 or S1403, next, the value of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is subtracted and updated (S1404), and the display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated. (S1405), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol variation stop process (S215), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation stop processing (S215). In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S215), in contrast to the above-described first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S209 in FIG. 33), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. , the content of the process executed when the lottery result is other than a jackpot has been changed, the process to set a flag to stop the fluctuation of the other special symbol has been omitted, and the lottery result this time is a jackpot. They are different in that when it is determined that it is not (S1501: No), special map 2 out-of-place stop processing (S1514) is executed. Since other points are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the contents of the special symbol 2 off-stopping process (S1508) executed in the second special symbol variation stopping process (see FIG. 42) will be explained. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 out-of-place stop processing (S1508). This special symbol 2 out-of-win stop processing (S1508) is a special symbol change corresponding to the case where the lottery result obtained in the second jackpot determination processing (see S908 in FIG. 37) is other than a jackpot (small hit or miss). It executes a stop process, and also executes a process of canceling the fluctuation of the first special symbol (forced stop) or temporarily stopping it, depending on the winning type of small win.

When the special figure 2 missing stop process (S1614) is executed, it is first determined whether the small hit flag 203x is set to on (S1601), and if it is determined that the small hit flag 203x is set to on, (S1601: Yes), it is determined whether the small winning type won this time is small winning A (S1602). If it is determined that the small winning type won this time is small winning A (S1602: Yes), a process for temporarily stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r is 0 or more, that is, whether the first special symbol is being varied (S1603). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0 (S1603: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to on (S1604), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is turned on. A special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating this is set (S1605), and the process moves to S1606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 (S1603: No), the first special symbol is not fluctuating, so the processing of S1604 to S1605 is skipped, and the processing of S1607 is to move to.

In this embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit, and depending on the winning type of small win, the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted) when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped. ), or execute a process to forcibly stop when it misses. As mentioned above, when the winning small win type is small win A, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203i is set to ON, and the special figure 1 temporary stop command is sent to the main processing of the main control device 110 (FIG. 52). The output signal is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in (see). When the voice lamp control device 113 side receives the special pattern 1 temporary stop command, the temporary stop mode is set to indicate that the first special pattern (special pattern 1) has temporarily stopped (is being done). A display command for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is set and outputted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes processing for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special figure 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S1602, if it is determined that the winning small hit type is not A (that is, it is small win B), the special drawing 1 cancellation process (S1606) is executed, and the Move to processing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606), which is one process of the special figure 2 out-of-place stop process (S1514 in FIG. 43), will be described. In this special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606), when the process of stopping the variation of the second special symbol is executed, when the variation result is small hit B, the variation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. Execute the process.

In the special figure 1 cancellation process (S1606), first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is greater than 0 (S1651). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is not a value greater than 0 (S1651: No), there is no need to forcibly stop the first special symbol, so the process ends as is. On the other hand, in the process of S1651, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is larger than 0 (S1651: Yes), a special figure 1 variation stop command is set (S1652). This special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by external output processing (S2401) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 52), which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 side receives the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop command, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) comes off and is forced to stop, so the stop mode is changed. A display command for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is set and outputted to the display control device 114.

Next, the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (S1654). Then, the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is set to 0 (S1655), and the process moves to S1656. In the process of S1656, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203n corresponding to the special figure 1 is on (S1656). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is off (S1656: Yes), the jackpot flag 203n is set off (S1657), the memory information for the special map 1 jackpot is deleted (S1658), and this process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is not on (S1656: No), the process is immediately ended.

In this embodiment, when a small win B is won in the special figure 2 game, the special figure 1 variation being executed is forced to stop due to a miss. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player during the probability game and losing interest in the game, and it is possible to provide a safe game.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be able to be executed independently and in parallel. The special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed variably at the same time. Therefore, more special symbol lottery games can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a jackpot will be awarded to a player within a predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Furthermore, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a fluctuating manner at the same time and a lottery game is executed, if a jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbols is stopped, the player can concentrate on playing the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a symbol indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol) or a small prize symbol is stopped and displayed on either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly displayed. Although the system is configured to stop and display a winning symbol, it is not limited to this, and depending on the winning jackpot type or small winning type, the other special symbol can be temporarily stopped or fluctuatedly displayed with the measurement of the fluctuating time interrupted. It consists of With this configuration, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or notification mode that lets the player know that they are temporarily stopped, so the player can change the lottery game that was in the middle of a variable display. It is possible to know that the game has not disappeared, and to play a jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), it is determined whether a ball has entered any of the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning). , If a starting prize is won, each obtained item will be awarded up to the maximum number of reserved balls (up to 4 pieces in total for the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and lower first ball entrance 64b2, and up to 4 balls for the second ball entrance 640). This is a process of storing the counter value in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively.

In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved balls is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a Or, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage areas 203b, a process (so-called pre-reading process) is executed to predict the validity determination result, the selected variation pattern, etc. in advance. . The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 45) will be described below.

In the starting prize winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), first, it is determined whether the ball has entered the first starting hole, which is the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (starting winning). (S1701). Here, entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is detected. It is determined that the ball has entered the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 (there is a starting prize) (S1701: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1 ) (S1702), and determines whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703).

In other words, is the number of balls held for the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 currently smaller than the upper limit of 4 balls (in other words, is the number of balls held up to the upper limit not stored? ) is determined. If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (1704), and the voice lamp control device 113 A command for the number of reserved balls is set for notifying the number of reserved balls at the first starting opening (the number of lottery rights reserved for the first special symbol) (S1705).

Then, each value of the various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, fluctuation type counter CS1) is read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer. Each ball is held (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of held balls of 203a (S1706).

Next, a first prefetch process is executed (S1707). This first pre-reading process (S1707) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48, but the validity judgment result and the determined fluctuation pattern are determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. , processing to determine the stop type, etc. is executed. In addition, although this embodiment is configured to execute processing for determining the validity judgment result, determined fluctuation pattern, stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, this is not limited to this. For example, when there is a new starting prize, the result of judgment on all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the fluctuation pattern to be determined, It may be configured to execute processing for determining the stop type and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, when storing new information (winning information) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, that is, when the lottery right for the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol Although the configuration is such that the content of the lottery right (winning information) is determined in advance, the content of the lottery right (winning information) for the second special symbol is determined in advance, but the present invention is not limited to this. ) may be configured to be determined in advance.

After executing the process in S1707, the process in S1708 is then executed. In addition, if it is determined in the process of S1701 that the ball has not entered the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 (S1701: No), or in the process of S1703, If it is determined that the number of balls reserved for the first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is the upper limit value (S1703: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d. is skipped and the process proceeds to S1708.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is added, the first pre-reading process (S1707) based on the information regarding the added winnings (winning information) is performed. Although the configuration is such that the execution is not limited to this, for example, when it is determined in the process of S1703 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) (S1703 : No), that is, when a ball is entered into the first ball entry port 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first pre-reading process (S1707) may be executed. It may be configured to do so. Thereby, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the pre-reading process. In addition, when a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, added value may be added. Therefore, when a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaching the upper limit, the player's desire to play decreases. This can be suppressed.

Next, for each process from S1708 to S1714, the ball enters the first starting port (upper first ball entry port 64b1 or lower first ball entry port 64b2) executed in each process from S1701 to S1707. The only difference is that the same processing as that performed on the second ball entry port 640 is performed on the second ball entry port 640, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is comprised so that a small win can be won by the lottery of the 2nd special symbol, the value of the small win type counter C5 is also acquired in the process of S1713.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the first prefetching process (S1707), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this first prefetching process (S1707).

In the first pre-reading process (S1707 in FIG. 46), first, various counter values are obtained from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2. , each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read out (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the prefetch pending storage area (S1822).

If the determination result in the process of S1823 is a jackpot (jackpot only in low probability state, jackpot only in high probability state, jackpot in both low probability state and high probability state) (S1823: Yes), it is a jackpot. A first winning command is set that indicates the conditions for winning (gaming state set at the time of lottery) and the type of jackpot in the event of winning (S1824), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination result in the process of S1823 is that it is not a jackpot (it is a win even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state) (S1823: No), a first winning command indicating a win is set. (S1825), this process ends.

Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 includes, as common information, in addition to the information for indicating the above-mentioned result of the judgment (information that has different meanings based on the result of the judgment). It is also set to include information indicating the values of various counter values read out in the process of S1821. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 52).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when a winning command is received, the display mode of the reserved balls is changed based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the reserved balls is changed to a color different from normal). It is possible to execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which the player is shown the result of a judgment of success or failure by displaying a variable) or by displaying a preview symbol or the like before the change starts.

In addition, in this embodiment, when performing the pre-reading process, the validity determination result when the special symbol is in a high probability state and the validity determination result when the special symbol is in a low probability state are determined, and the results of each determination are Although the configuration is such that the winning command is set based on the winning command, it is not limited to this, and for example, the judgment value ( It may also be configured such that a winning command indicating a jackpot of a special symbol is set only when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined and the determination value is read.

With this configuration, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the audio lamp control device 113 side only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot, so special symbols for which the pre-read effect is not executed In response to fluctuations, it is possible to create a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, the gaming state when a special symbol lottery is held based on the pending memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol pending storage area 203a is accurately determined, and the game state is determined based on the gaming state. It may be configured to perform a validity determination. In this case, the determination can be made by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of balls on hold at the start of the variation, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of balls on hold. When pre-reading is executed, the game state at the time of the start of fluctuation can be determined by determining the fluctuation order until the fluctuation of the reserved ball starts based on the information stored in suspension.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a new pending memory (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol pending storage area 203a, a pre-reading process based on the winning information is executed, and during the pre-reading process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the pre-reading process of the main controller 110, winning information newly stored (memorized) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a is used. It is also possible to set information indicating the contents (each counter value) of the content (reserved memory) as a winning command, and to predict the result of the win/fail judgment based on the information included in the winning command received on the audio lamp control device 113 side. good.

With this configuration, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 side executes a process to determine whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, and when it is determined that a prefetch effect is to be executed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is It may be configured to perform analysis (prediction of validity determination results). Thereby, when the pre-read effect is not executed, the specific pre-read process (prediction of the result of judgment of validity) is not executed, so it is possible to suppress unnecessary control being executed in the pachinko machine 10. Further, it is possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the result of a prefetch process executed without a title.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the second prefetching process (S1714), which is one process of the starting prize winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this second prefetching process (S1714). The second pre-reading process (S1714 in FIG. 47) is performed when the first pre-reading process (S1707 in FIG. 46) described above is performed when the ball enters the first starting port (upper first ball entry port 64b1 or lower first ball entry port 64b2). This is a process in which the pending data (winning information) based on balls (starting winnings) are determined in advance (reading ahead) and various judgments are made. The only difference is that the winning information is changed from the winning information based on winning the ball to the winning information based on starting winning in the second starting port (second ball entering port 640), and the other details are the same. Further explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S2001). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is winning, it is the moment when the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is performed after the winning symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (after the winning symbol stops being displayed). This includes the middle part (until the winning game ends). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S2001: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S2001: No), it is determined whether the regular symbol on the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S2002). If it is determined that the normal symbol variation is not being displayed, that is, the current state is such that a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can be executed (S2002: No), then the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is The value (M) is acquired (S2003), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S2004).

If it is determined in the process of S2004 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S2004: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S2004: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S2005). In other words, if it is determined in the process of S2004 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation (that the winning information for use in the normal symbol variation is held and stored) is satisfied, the new normal symbol variation is held and stored. In order to execute the normal symbol variation using the winning information, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S2006). In the process of S2006, the data stored in normal symbol reservation 1 to normal symbol reservation 4 of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal symbol retention 1 → execution area, normal symbol retention 2 → ordinary symbol retention 1, ordinary symbol retention 3 → ordinary symbol retention 2, normal symbol retention 4 → ordinary symbol retention 4, etc. in each area. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S2007).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203m is on, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of normal symbols (S2008), and when it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is set to on. (S2008: Yes), a win/fail determination result (lottery result) is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202c for high probability times (see FIG. 11(c)), and the process moves to S2011. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is off (S2008: No), the success/failure determination result is determined based on the win determination value of the second random number table 202c for low probability times (see FIG. 11(c)). is acquired (S2010), and the process moves to S2011.

In the process of S2011, it is determined whether the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a win (S2011), and if it is determined to be a win (S2011: Yes), the "○" which is the display mode at the time of a win is displayed. The display mode is set (S2012), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern using the value of the ordinary symbol fluctuation type counter (S2014). On the other hand, in the process of S2011, if it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (it is a miss) (S2011: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode when it is a miss is set. (S2013), and proceeds to the process of S2014 described above.

Here, the process for determining the variation time of the normal symbols (processing in S2014) will be explained using the contents defined in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18). In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is calculated based on the set probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved regular symbols). It is configured to have variable settings based on. The ease with which the ball enters the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is configured to vary depending on the set variation time of the normal symbol.

As described above, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18) defines a variation time of 0.5 seconds when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. When a high probability state of normal symbols is set, a winning game (normal) based on an opening pattern in which a 0.1 second closing period (opening period) and a 0.8 second opening period is set. A per-figure game) is executed. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the normal symbol winning game ends before the ball that passes through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first ball entrance 64b2, so the ball The structure is such that the ball cannot enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2.

On the other hand, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the variable time is configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls of the regular symbol (value of the number of reserved balls counter 203f of the regular symbol), When the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is 0, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol is stipulated to be 30 seconds, and when the number of reserved balls of a regular symbol is 1 to 3, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol is 30 seconds. A fluctuation time of 1.4 seconds is specified as the fluctuation time.

When a low probability state with a normal symbol is set, a winning game (normal) based on an opening pattern in which a 0.7 second opening period is set after a 0.1 second closing period (opening period) is set. A per-figure game) is executed. Therefore, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0, when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (when the ball passes through the through gate 67) The ball is configured so that it cannot enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2 because the normal symbol variation (30 seconds variation) is in progress at 1.6 seconds after passing the ball. If the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 1 to 3, when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the lower first ball entrance 64b2 ( 1.6 seconds after passing through the through gate 67), a normal game is being executed, so the configuration is such that the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640.

In this way, by configuring to vary the degree of entry of the ball into the lower first ball entry port 64b2 according to the length of the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol, the lower first ball entry port 64b2 Since the ease with which a ball enters the ball can be easily changed depending on the game state, various game features can be created.

Furthermore, as described above, the structure is such that it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry opening 64b2 even when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is made shorter or longer than the appropriate range. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry opening 64b2, for example, even in a game state (for example, a probability change state) in which it is necessary to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is set according to the game state of the normal symbol and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, but the variation pattern is not limited to this, for example, the acquisition It may be configured such that different fluctuation times are set based on the value of the ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, in the process of S2002, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed in a variable manner (S2002: No), the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. If it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S2015: No), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the process of S2015 (S2015: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S2016). In the process of S2016, if the current normal symbol lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the "○" symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) on the second symbol display device 83. That is, settings are made to stop displaying the display mode set in the process of S2012 or S2013 described above.

When the stop display is set in the process of S2016, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed as the second symbol in the display mode set in the process of S2012 or S2013. A stop display (lit display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether the current lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit (S2017). If it is determined that the lottery result of this normal symbol is a hit (S2017: Yes), a process for setting the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current lottery result of the normal symbol is not a hit (a loss) (S2017: No), this process is ended as is.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a in this embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the validity of the normal symbol (timing of performing the processing of S2008 to S2011), Probability of the normal symbol set at the timing of executing the validity determination of the normal symbol and setting the release control mode (release pattern) of the electric accessory 64a (timing when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the process of S2015) It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in this embodiment, the fluctuation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols and the fluctuation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and the fluctuation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols is executed independently. The probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation process (lottery process) related to special symbols that is executed in parallel during the period when the variation process (lottery process) related to normal symbols is being executed, the normal symbols may A high probability state is set, and a low probability state of a normal symbol may be set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a.

In such a situation, for example, the opening control mode (opening If you set the long open pattern), the electric accessory 64a will open long while the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the release pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set) ).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a is determined, and the electric accessory is determined based on the determination result. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 64a. Thereby, the electric accessory 64a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

In the process of S2017, if it is determined that the current lottery result of the normal symbol is a win (S2017: Yes), next, to determine the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the current normal symbol. Then, it is determined whether the time saving flag 203m is on (S2018), and if it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is not on (off), that is, the current state is a low probability state of normal symbols (S2018: No), the opening pattern "0.7 seconds x 1 time", which executes opening for 0.7 seconds once, is set as the opening pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol (S2019).

On the other hand, in the process of S2018, if it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is set to ON (S2018: Yes), an opening for 0.8 seconds is executed once as an opening pattern for a high probability state of a normal symbol. The opening pattern "0.8 seconds x 1 time" is set (S2020). In other words, in this embodiment, the opening pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol (0.8 seconds x 1 time) is better than the opening pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol (0.7 seconds x 1 time). , the electric accessory 64a is configured to be open for a long period of time. Therefore, when the opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a is set to a high probability state of normal symbols, it is more advantageous for the player to win a winning game (lower probability state) than when a low probability state of normal symbols is set. The period in which the first ball entry port 64b2 is in the open state is longer.

Next, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set based on the opening pattern set in the process of S2019 or S2020 (S2021), and this process ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the validity judgment of the normal symbol is executed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of determining the validity of the normal symbol, and the release control mode of the electric accessory 64a that is moved in the winning game of the normal symbol is Although the opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a is configured to be set based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the (opening pattern), the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the validity of the normal symbol may be determined. The high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 64a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol. It may be configured such that the electric accessory 64a is opened long only when the electric accessory 64a is open, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 64a may be set based on the gaming state set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not. It may be configured to set.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the general pattern is determined from the general pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 18) based on the value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f, normal symbol fluctuation patterns are set corresponding to each game state and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. In cases other than the definite variable state (probable variable: with electric support), there is only one type of variation pattern, and the same variation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected regular figure variation type counter.

Next, referring to FIG. 49, the through gate passing process executed in the first embodiment is executed (S107). This process is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting gate (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the second winning This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S2101). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S2101: Yes), next, it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the normal state (S2102), If it is determined that it is in the normal state (S2002: Yes), this means that a right-handed game was performed while the normal state was set, so a notification command is set to indicate a firing abnormality (S2103). , the process moves to S2106.

When the notification command set by the process of S2103 is output (notified) to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 executes an abnormality notification process, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the firing abnormality. A first abnormality notification mode (not shown) shown in FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that the current gaming state is not the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) (S2102: No), then the current gaming state is It is determined whether it is in a certain state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) (S2104), and if it is determined that it is in a certain state (S2104: Yes), a second notification indicating firing abnormality is issued. A command is set (S2105), and the process moves to S2106. If it is determined in the process of S2104 that the state is not a variable probability state (it is a potential state) (S2104: No), the process directly proceeds to S2106.

Here, when the second notification command set by the process of S2105 is output (notified) to the audio lamp control device 113, an abnormality notification process is executed on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 A second abnormality notification mode (not shown) indicating a firing abnormality is displayed.

In this way, by configuring the system to determine that a right-handed game is being performed when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is possible to determine whether or not a right-handed game is being performed. Since there is no need to provide a dedicated detection means (for example, a sensor for detecting that the fired ball has reached the gaming area beyond the variable display unit 80), manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, by setting different notification commands to indicate a firing abnormality depending on the game state set at the time when a right-handed game is being played, different abnormality notification modes can be easily displayed. can.

Note that in this embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is determined that a right-handed game is being executed. Any other configuration may be used as long as it is configured to detect this, for example, a detection means that detects that the operation handle 51 is operated with enough strength (operation amount) to launch a ball into the right-handed hitting area. may be provided.

Returning to FIG. 51, the explanation will be continued. After completing the processing in S2103 to S2105, the processing in S2106 is executed next. In S2106, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired, and then whether the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 4 (normal symbol reserved ball number has reached the upper limit (S2107).

In the process of S2107, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit value is 4) (S2107: No), this process is ended as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (3 or less) (S2107: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is determined. 1 is added (S2108), the normal symbol reserved ball number command (command for indicating the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f) is set (S2109), and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is set to normal. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S2110), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 50, NMI interrupt processing will be explained. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. As shown in FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S2201), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout firing control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2301). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S2302). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2303).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2304), and if it is turned on (S2304: Yes), the process moves to S2312. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305), and if it is not stored (S2305: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S2312 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S2306), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S2307: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S2312 in such a case. Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2312, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2312). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S2313, S2314).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup process, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S2313, S2314) is executed.

In addition, in the case where the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S2313, S2314) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S2313, S2314), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2313), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2314). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S2310.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S2305: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S2307: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2308). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit execution of various effects (S2310). After that, interrupts are permitted (S2311). Then, the process moves to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above startup processing will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is roughly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main processing (see FIG. 52), first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 29), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is sent to each sub-side control. External output processing to be sent to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2401). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the award corresponding to the number of balls acquired is sent to the payout control device 111. Send a sphere command. Further, the command for the number of reserved balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 29) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 45) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, through this external output process (S2401 in FIG. 52), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are sent. Information for setting effects (variable effects, decorative effects, etc.). In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 53) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2402). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 has been updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2403), and then, in the case of a special symbol jackpot, the sound lamp control device 113 A jackpot control process is executed to set a command for executing a jackpot effect and to open or close the left variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650 (S2404).

The details of the jackpot control process (S2404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55, but in this jackpot control process (S2404), the left variable winning device 65, the right variable winning device When the device 650 (hereinafter referred to as the winning opening, etc.) is opened, the maximum opening time of the winning opening, etc. (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650) has elapsed, or the winning opening, etc. (left variable winning device 65) has elapsed. , the right variable winning device 650) determines whether a prescribed number of balls have won. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning opening etc. (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650) is closed. Opening and closing of the winning openings (left variable winning device 65, right variable winning device 650) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, a small win control process regarding a small win game to be executed when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery is executed (S2405). In this small win control process (S2405), for the right variable winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game, the period in which the V winning hole 650a is opened and the period in which it is closed are set according to a predetermined scenario ( A process for setting is executed based on the small winning scenario). The details of the small hit control process (S2405) will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (S2406). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S2021 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. In addition, the opening/closing control of this electric accessory is continued until the period set by the process of S2019 and the process of S2020 in the normal symbol variation process ends.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B (S2407). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 30) or the second special symbol variation start process (S212 in FIG. 36), the process corresponds to the variation pattern. The variable display starts on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. In this embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started, that red LED Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. turns off the light and lights up the red LED.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see Figure 30) or the second special symbol variation start process (see Figure 36) ends Then, the fluctuating display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is ended, and the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 36) is performed by the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 34). In the display mode set in step S507 (see), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in a halt state (lit display) on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. For the second special symbol, the same process is performed to stop display (light up display) the stop symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol), the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a loss (missing symbol). The system is configured, and the stop display for that purpose is also executed.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the second symbol display device (S2408). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S2014 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), variable display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display is performed in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process (S2408), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process in S2016 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the second symbol display update process (S2408) is executed in the second symbol display device. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S2012 or S2013 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48). (lit display).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S2410). If the predetermined time has already passed (S2410: Yes), the process moves to S2401, and the processes from S2401 described above are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main processing (S2410: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2411, S2412).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2411). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S2411 (S2412). In addition, in the process of S2412, the value of the normal figure variation type counter CS2 is updated similarly to the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process from S2401 to S2408 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the regular pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 can also be randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to understand the processing details for updating the judgment value regarding the lottery of special symbols and normal symbols, and to prevent illegal games from being executed at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to a win is obtained. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the process of S2409, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 50 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S2413 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2413), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S2414). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S2415), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2416), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S2409 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S2401 to S2408, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S2411 and S2412 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from the process of S2401. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2401, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is saved during the initial setting process (S2301). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2401. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53, the jackpot control process (S2404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2404). This jackpot control process (S2404) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, information for executing various effects according to the jackpot is used. This is a process for setting (commands) and opening or closing winning openings (specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S2404), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the jackpot of the special symbol (S2501). Specifically, S809 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38) or S1509 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set. If so, it is determined that a special symbol jackpot has started. In the process of S2501, if it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is the start timing (S2501: Yes), an opening command is set (S2502), and this process ends.

It should be noted that the opening command may be configured to be transmitted with a delay (variable) depending on the gaming state or jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. When a special symbol jackpot or small win starts, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpot A, 5000 for jackpot B). If this occurs, the opening command may be sent. By doing this, for example, if a jackpot occurs in a left-handed game, the time until the jackpot starts will be lengthened, and if a jackpot occurs in a right-handed game, the time until the jackpot starts will be increased. It can be made shorter. In this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs during a left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to a right-handed game as a jackpot game. According to the above configuration, when a jackpot occurs in a left-handed game, it is possible to secure enough time to switch to a right-handed game (jackpot game). Thereby, the operational burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if it is determined that it is not the special symbol jackpot start timing (S2501: No), then it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S2503). In the process of S2503, the game information related to the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203k is read out and determined.

During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S2503: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S2503: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S2504).

If it is determined in the process of S2504 that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S2505). Details of this jackpot operation setting process (S2505) will be explained with reference to FIG. (operation processing of member 650h) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot operation setting process (S2505), which is one process in the jackpot control process (S2404 in FIG. 53), will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2505).

When the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) is executed, first, among the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the current jackpot, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. The operation scenario is read (S2641). Then, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (variable variable solenoid) 650k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S2641 (S2642). Next, the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the left variable winning device 65 or the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set using the data read in the process of S2641 (S2643). After that, this process ends.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a jackpot game (round game) in which an opening operation is performed on the first attacker (right variable winning device 650) as a jackpot game, and a jackpot game (round game) in which the opening operation is performed on the first attacker (right variable winning device 650), and It is configured to be able to execute a jackpot game (round game) in which an opening operation is performed against the player, and the process of S2642 described above is performed in a round game in which the first attacker (right variable prize winning device 650) is opened. This is stipulated only for the opening operation scenario corresponding to the first round game. Therefore, when playing other round games, the corresponding opening operation scenario is a scenario in which the channel solenoid (variable solenoid) 650k is opened (a scenario in which the switching member 650h is moved to communicate the special discharge channel 650e2). is not defined, the process of S2642 is skipped.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a jackpot game, the jackpot game will not end prematurely. Problems can be suppressed. Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504 in FIG. 55: Yes), a round is played to indicate that a new round game will be executed. The command is configured to be set. The round command set here is output to the audio ramp control device 113, and the audio ramp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine the progress status of the jackpot game being executed. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 which round the game is currently being played.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a round command set by the main control device 110, a round command including information indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a round command including only information indicating that a round game has been newly started may be set. In this case, a means is provided to measure the number of round commands received during one jackpot game on the voice ramp control device 113 side, and the voice ramp control device 113 side can determine what round the round game to be executed this time is. It may be configured such that the display mode of the round number display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the calculation result. With this configuration, the amount of information included in the round command set on the main control device 110 side can be reduced, so the burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 55, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2504, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2504: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to operate the opening/closing door 650f1 (S2506). If it is determined that it is the operation timing (S2506: Yes), the opening solenoid 650f2 is set to ON (S2507). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the opening operation (S2506: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509). The starting timing of the ending effect is when the final round in the jackpot game (in the case of jackpot A, the second round) is finished, the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (in this embodiment, the ball is removed) is reached. , 3 seconds) have elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. If it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S2510), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending performance (S2509: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2511). Note that the end timing of the jackpot is specifically the end timing of the set ending effect. In the process of S2511, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending effect) (S2511: Yes), a jackpot end process is executed to set the end of the jackpot (S2512), and the main process end. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the jackpot (S2511), this process is immediately ended.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S2512) will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S2512). In this jackpot end processing (S2512), the value of the probability variation counter is updated, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set according to the type of jackpot won, or the high probability state of the normal symbol is set based on the type of jackpot won. Processing such as setting is executed.

When the jackpot end process (S2512) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203h is 3 (S2701). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation count counter 203h is 3 or more (S2701: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g and time saving flag 203m are set to off (S2702), since the probability variation count is the upper limit of 3. The value of the number counter 203h is reset (S2703). Then, a command indicating a change in the gaming state is set (S2709), and this processing is ended.

In this embodiment, the variable probability state or the probability state is set up to three times after the end of the jackpot game, and when the number of times reaches three, the gaming state becomes the normal state. This configuration has the effect that the player can enjoy the probability game or the probability game up to three times with peace of mind. In this embodiment, the number of probability variations is set to three times or less, but it is not limited to this, and may be set to five times or may be updated randomly. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a wide variety of gaming features.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the value of the definite variable number counter 203h is not 3 (that is, it is 2 or less), it is not the timing to end the definite variable, so the value of the definite variable number counter 203h is incremented by 1. (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type won this time is A (S2705). If it is determined that the current jackpot type is A (S2705: Yes), the time saving flag 203m and the probability variable flag 203g are set to ON in order to set the probability variable state as the gaming state (S2706), and the above-mentioned S2709 Execute the process and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is not A (S2705: No), in order to set the probability state as the gaming state, the time saving flag 203m is set to OFF (S2707), and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON ( S2708). Then, the process of S2709 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56, the small hit control process (S2405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S2405). This small hit control process (S2405) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32), and is used to execute various effects according to the small win when the pachinko machine 10 is in a small win state with a special symbol. This is a process for setting information (commands) and opening or closing the right variable winning device 650.

In the small hit control process (S2405), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start a small hit (S2801). If it is the timing to start a small win (S2801: Yes), a small win opening command is set (S2802), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start a small win (S2801: No), it is determined whether or not a small win is occurring (S2803). If it is determined that the small win is not in progress (S2803: Yes), there is no need to execute control for the small win, so the process ends as is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a small win (S2803: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing to open the right variable winning device 650 (S2804). If it is determined that it is the timing for the opening operation (S2804: Yes), the opening solenoid is set to be on (S2805), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the release operation (S2804: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the small hit (S2806). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the small win (S2806: Yes), the small win flag 203x is set to OFF (S2807), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the small hit (S2806: No), this process is ended.

<About the control process executed by the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 71. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 57, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by the power-off process in S4116 (see Figure 58) due to an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "momentary power outage"). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 58, upon receiving power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 58), the audio lamp control device 113 executes power-off processing in S4116. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4116 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S4116 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process moves to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process moves to S4008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process moves to S4004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process moves to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process in S4117, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You may also do so.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 58). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4116 is executed, so the reason why the process in S4008 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), in order to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113, the working area of the RAM is cleared (S4009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010), and then , sets interrupt permission (S4011), and shifts to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S4008 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after, for example, the power was completely shut off. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process skips S4009, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, moves to S4010, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004 when the process reaches S4008 from S4004 through the process in S4006. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, it is first determined whether 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main processing was started or since the processing in S4101 was previously executed (S4101). If the time has not passed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is the process of S4102 to S4110 related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S4111 and the variable display setting process in S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process in S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110. By executing the process in S4111 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, a command to send various commands to the display control device 114 set in the processes of S4103 to S4113 to the display control device 114 is sent. Output processing is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108, which will be described later (S4103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting performance, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device. 114.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is then executed (S4108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S4110). After this, the process moves to S4111. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

After the process in S4110, a command determination process (S4111) is executed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110, and the process moves to S4112. Details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4112, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. Execute the variable display setting process, which is the process to set up to send to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

When the process of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4117), and the process is then looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. . The details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4111), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the special command is sent from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4201). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol. In the process of S4201, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start process is executed (S4202), and this process ends. Details of this special figure 1 variation start process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110. (S4203). The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the process of S4203, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start process provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S4204), and this process is ended. Details of this special figure 2 variation start process (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows it to be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is used in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. , when notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting a variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol) used in cases where

In the process of S4203, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received. (S4205). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4206) and this process is ended. Details of this stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

On the other hand, in the process of S4205, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: No), the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main controller 110. It is determined (S4207). Here, if it is determined that the held pitch count command has been received (S4207: Yes), the held pitch count process (S4208) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the pending pitch count processing (S4208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

Further, in the process of S4207, if it is determined that the number of reserved pitches command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). In the process of S4209, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4209: Yes), the information of the winning information command received this time is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4210), and this process ends. .

In the process of S4209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4211: Yes), status command reception processing is executed (S4212), and this processing ends. The details of this status command reception process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. Processing is executed to set the winning game state (medium jackpot, middle jackpot) in the subordinate state setting area 223k.

Next, in the process of S4211, if it is determined that a status command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether a fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4213). If it is determined in the process of S4213 that a fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4213), the fluctuation stop process is executed (S4214), and this process ends. Although a detailed explanation of this fluctuation stop processing (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is Processing for setting the display mode of the variable production using the fourth symbol or the fourth symbol is executed.

In this embodiment, a variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when special symbol variation is executed as a period during which the variation display of the special symbol is executed. Even when a special symbol variation is being executed based on the above, there are cases where a process of forcibly stopping the special symbol variation may be executed depending on the result of another special symbol variation. Therefore, it is possible to execute the fluctuation stop processing (S4214) on the audio lamp control device 113 side and stop the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) of the third and fourth symbols in accordance with the timing at which the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. It is configured so that it can be done. Thereby, it is possible to synchronize the fluctuation state of the special symbols and the state of the fluctuation performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand display mode to the player.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, if it is determined that a fluctuation stop related command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received (S4215), and if a temporary stop related command has been received. If it is determined (S4215: Yes), a temporary stop related process is executed (S4216), and this process ends. The details of the temporary stop related process (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66, but an effect display corresponding to the temporary stop that is executed when a jackpot or small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery. It performs processing for the third symbol display device 81 to execute.

In the process of S4215, if it is determined that a temporary stop related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether a winning related command has been received (S4217), and if it is determined that a winning related command has been received. (S4217: Yes), executes win related processing (S4218), and ends this processing. The details of the win-related process (S4218) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68, but the performance corresponding to the jackpot game or small win game that is executed when a jackpot or small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery. It performs processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

In the process of S4217, if it is determined that a winning related command has not been received (S4217: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (S4219), and this process ends. In the process of S4220, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, that command is executed. This command is used to set a command so as to send the command to the display control device 114.

The command determination process (S4111 in FIG. 59) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment has been described above, but regarding the order in which it is determined whether or not various commands have been received in the command determination process (S4111). , an order other than the order shown in this embodiment may be used; for example, the process of determining whether or not a status command has been received may be performed using either the special figure 1 variation pattern command or the special figure 2 variation pattern command. The order of determination may be defined so that the process is performed before the process of determining whether or not a message has been received.

With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, during the first special symbol fluctuation start process of the main controller 110 (see S210 in FIG. 30). In this case, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 32) is executed, the special symbol 1 variation pattern command is set, and the state command indicating that the gaming state has been changed is then set. Also, the gaming state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, for example, if you win a jackpot on special map 1 with the probability variable state set and the probability state is set during the jackpot variation, the audio lamp control device 113 side will not set the probability state. It is possible to easily set a variation performance corresponding to a variation pattern command that becomes a jackpot variation in a state where it is determined that a jackpot has been won.

Note that, unlike the configuration of this embodiment, if the configuration is configured to execute processing according to the fluctuation pattern command before the state command determination processing, from the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the above-mentioned jackpot fluctuation, the probability fluctuation Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery during the state is received first, and a variable display is set according to the received content. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute a variable display indicating that the probability state is set at the same time as the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started. As the variable display indicating that the potential state has been set is delayed in this way, the timing of notifying the player that he/she will be allowed to play the right-handed game is delayed, causing discomfort to the player. The problem arises.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main controller 110 side executes the process of varying the gaming state after determining whether or not a jackpot has occurred and setting the fluctuation pattern, whereas the voice lamp controller 113 The player is configured to first execute a process of determining the current gaming state, and then set a variable display corresponding to the variable pattern. Therefore, even though a potential state is set, it is possible to reliably prevent a variable display corresponding to a previous gaming state from being set and executed.

In addition, by configuring the audio lamp control device 113 side to specify the order in which various commands are output from the main control device 110, it is necessary to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. This makes it possible to reduce the Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 variation start process (S4202). This special figure 1 variation start process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is Accordingly, a process for setting a display mode (a main variation variation pattern, a sub variation variation pattern) corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The display control device 114 then displays the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 73), which will be described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (S4202) will be explained.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is set, first. Set the special figure 1 variation start flag 223e on (S4301), extract a variation pattern from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4302), and select a detailed display mode using the variation pattern selection table 222a S4303 ).

Next, the information (information indicating the current gaming state) set (stored) in the subordinate state setting area 223k is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the probable state (S4304). In the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current state is not a probability state (normal state, variable probability state) (S4304: No), the special A display command indicating the main fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 1 is set (S4305), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a potential state (S4304: Yes), this is the gaming state in which the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main one (the first special symbol is Since this is a game state in which the variable display is subordinate), a display command indicating the special figure 1 subordinate variation pattern is set (S4306), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204). This special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is Accordingly, a process is executed to set a display mode (variation pattern for main variation, variation pattern for sub-variation) corresponding to the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The display control device 114 then displays the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71), which will be described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (S4204) will be explained.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is set, first. The special figure 2 variation start flag 223f is set on (S4351), a variation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command (S4352), and a detailed display mode is selected using the variation pattern selection table 222a ( S4353).

Next, the information (information indicating the current gaming state) set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223k is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the probable state (S4354). In the process of S4354, if it is determined that the current state is not a probability state (normal state, variable probability state) (S4354: No), since the variable display of the second special symbol is a secondary game state, the special A display command indicating the subordinate variation pattern shown in FIG. 2 is set (S4355), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4354, if it is determined that the gaming state is a potential state (S4354: Yes), this is the gaming state in which the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is the main (fluctuating display of the first special symbol is the secondary game state), a display command indicating the special figure 2 main fluctuation pattern is set (S4356), and this processing is ended.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol and the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (parallel), both special symbols While simultaneously displaying the variable effect display corresponding to the variable display of the 3rd symbol and 4th symbol on the 3rd symbol display device 81, each special symbol (the 1st symbol By configuring the display mode (the size of the display area and whether or not it is displayed as a third symbol) of the special symbol and the second special symbol to be variably set, it is possible to adjust the fluctuation situation (lottery results and number of fluctuations) in the current situation. It is possible to easily make the player understand the special symbol type to be watched.

Therefore, even if a game specification is used in which a plurality of special symbol types are varied (lottery) at the same time (in parallel), it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with a game that is difficult to understand.

Next, the stop type command receiving process (S4206) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (S4206). This stop type command reception process (S4206) is executed during the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described below.

In the stop type command reception process (S4206), first, in response to the received command, if the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON, and the special figure 2 stop type command is set to ON. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4401). Next, the stop type (big hit A to jackpot D, small hit, miss, out of reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402), and this process ends.

The stop type extracted in the process of S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol. Each is stored in a way that allows identification of the stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (Special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (Special symbol 2) start varying at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop type respectively, and to execute appropriate variation display. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the contents of the reserved pitch count process (S4208) executed in the command determination process (S4151 in FIG. 59) will be explained. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the pending pitch count processing (S4208). In this pending pitch count processing (S4208), processing for setting the display mode of the competition mode is executed when the gaming state is in the probable state.

When the number of pending balls processing (S4208) is executed, first, the symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the received command (number of pending balls command) is extracted (S4501), The value of the reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d) corresponding to the extracted symbol type is updated (S4502), and the process moves to S4503.

In the process of S4503, it is determined whether the gaming state is in potential (S4503). If it is determined that the ball is not in potential (normal state or variable probability state) (S4503: No), other processes related to the held ball are executed (S4509), and the present process ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is in potential (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether the right-handed flag 223j is on (S4504). This right-hitting flag 223j is set to ON in the jackpot related process (S5002) in the hit related process (S4218), and the held ball of the first special symbol is set to ON during the ending of the jackpot where the potential state is set after the jackpot game ends. This is a flag for setting a dash mode that prompts the player to play right-handed games when it is determined that there is a right-handed game. In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the right-handed player flag 223j is not on (S4504: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4504, if it is determined that the right-handed flag 223j is on (S4504: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S4505). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S4505: Yes), it is the timing to end the dash mode, so the dash end flag 223q is set to on (S4506), and the right-handed ball flag 223j is set. is set to OFF (S4507), other processes related to the held ball are executed (S4508), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol reserved ball number is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S4505: No), other processes are executed (S4508), and this process is ended.

In the present embodiment, when the potential state is reached, the player is notified that there is a reserved ball in the first special symbol using the dash mode, but depending on the state of the first special symbol, The execution of the special figure 2 game may be displayed more emphatically. Specifically, the display mode of the right hit display may be varied depending on the gaming state or the lottery result, such as when the first special symbol is not changing, when the winning is changing, or when the jackpot is changing. This makes it possible to encourage the player to play the special figure 2 game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the status command processing (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this status command processing (S4212). This state command processing (S4212) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set gaming state. This is to execute processing for setting different display modes displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81. The details of the status command processing (S4212) will be explained below.

When the status command process (S4212) is executed, first, it is determined whether the currently set gaming status is to be changed (S4601). Here, it is determined whether the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223k and the gaming state indicated by the currently received state command are different. In the process of S4601, if it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state after the change is the normal state (S4602).

In the process of S4602, if it is determined that the changed gaming state is the normal state (if the status command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: Yes), the main display area corresponding to the normal state A setting command is set (S4603), a display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4604), information indicated by the status command received this time is stored (set) in the slave status setting area 223k (S4610), and this process is executed. finish.

Here, the display control device 114 is notified of the commands set in the processing of S4603 and S4604, thereby executing the variable effect display in the normal state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the types ( mode, background) and outputs a command indicating the type to the display control device 114.

With this configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each gaming state set on the audio lamp control device 113 side. In other words, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set gaming state and a variable pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of special symbols are output to the display control device 114. Based on the type command and common command received on the display control device 114 side, display data is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current gaming state and the received variation pattern. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the case where the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, The configuration is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the display data after setting from the display control device 114 side to the audio lamp control device 113 side, and confirms that the confirmation information received on the audio lamp control device 113 side is appropriate. A determination means is provided to determine whether the information is present, and if the determination result is determined to be inappropriate, a simple display variation pattern command that indicates appropriate information is set, and the content of the display data that has already been set is changed. It is preferable to configure the display data to be rewritten to simple display data.

With this configuration, when appropriate display data is not set for various commands received by the audio lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110, simple display data indicating appropriate information can be set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to execution of a variable effect display with content different from the actual game result (special symbol lottery result). In addition, examples of the above-mentioned simple display data include display data that displays a special mode that does not correspond to any gaming state (for example, a black background mode), and display data that displays a variable display of the fourth symbol. It is sufficient to use display data that has a smaller amount of data than the display data used in normal variable effect display.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned configuration is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the display variation pattern command is set on the audio lamp control device 113 side based on the current gaming state and the received variation pattern. It may be configured to do so.

Returning to FIG. 64, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4602, if it is determined that the gaming state after the change is not the normal state (if the status command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: No), then the gaming state after the change is It is determined whether the gaming state is in a certain state (S4605), and if it is determined that the gaming state is in a certain state (the status command received this time is a command indicating a certain state) (S4605: Yes), the game state is in a certain state. A main display area setting command corresponding to the state, that is, a command to set the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is set (S4606), a display command indicating the super mode is set (S4607), and the above-mentioned Then, the process moves to step S4610.

On the other hand, in the process of S4605, if it is determined that the changed gaming state is not a probable state (the status command received this time is not a command indicating a probable state), that is, if a state command indicating a variable probability state is received. (S4605: No), a main display area setting command corresponding to the variable probability state is set (S4608), a display command indicating the challenge mode is set (S4609), and the process moves to the process of S4610 described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the fluctuation stop process (S4214), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing (S4214). This fluctuation stop processing (S4214) sets the display mode when a fluctuation stop related command (a command set when the stop display is performed based on the lottery result of another special symbol lottery) is received from the main controller 110. The process to do so is executed.

When the fluctuation stop processing (S4214) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701). This special symbol 1 fluctuation stop command is set when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is stopped and displayed as a jackpot in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S215 in FIG. 42) of the main controller 110. (See S1503 in FIG. 42).

In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a potential state (whether the super mode is being executed) (S4702), and if it is determined that it is in a potential state (S4702: Yes), a display command for stopping the dependent variation is set (S4703), and the process moves to S4705. When the display command for stopping the sub-variation is set in the process of S4703, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1 (see FIG. 6(a)) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4702 that it is not in a potential state (S4702: No), a display command for stopping fluctuation corresponding to the interrupt V effect is set (S4704), and the process moves to the process of S4705. Further, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4701: No), the process moves to S4705.

Next, in the process of S4705, it is determined whether the fluctuation stop related command received this time is the special chart 2 fluctuation stop command (S4705). This special symbol 2 fluctuation stop command is set when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is stopped and displayed as a jackpot in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S209 in FIG. 34) of the main controller 110. (See S806 in FIG. 34).

In the process of S4705, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4705: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a potential state (whether the super mode is being executed) (S4706), and if it is determined that it is in a potential state (S4706: Yes), a display command for stopping the main fluctuation is set (S4707), and the process moves to S4709.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4706 that it is not in the potential state (S4706: No), a display command for stopping the dependent variation is set (S4708), and the process moves to the process of S4709. When the display command is set in the process of S4708, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm2 (see FIG. 7(a)) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss. Further, if it is determined in the process of S4705 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4705: No), the process moves to S4709.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the confirmation-related process (S4216), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the details of the confirmation-related process (S4216). In this confirmation related process (S4216), when the confirmation command of the first special symbol is received, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the dash mode, and the process to end the dash mode is executed.

In the confirmation-related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the dash end flag 223q is on (S4751). When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the special map 1 confirmation command from the main control device 110, it determines whether it is time to end the dash mode. If it is determined that the dash end flag 223q is on (S4751: Yes), a command indicating the end of dash mode is set (S4752), the dash end flag 223q is set to off (S4753), and this processing ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of S4751, if it is determined that the dash end flag 223q is not on (S4751: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4218) will be explained. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4218). This temporary stop related process (S4218) includes a process for determining the remaining time of the special symbol fluctuation time when a temporary stop command is received, and a production executed on the third symbol display device 81 when a 1 fluctuation restart command is received. (additional effects) is executed.

When the temporary stop related process (S4218) is executed, it is first determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4801), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4801: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop command is executed. The stop flag 223m is set on (S4802). Then, the remaining fluctuation time of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4803). Then, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time calculated in the process of S4803 is less than 5 seconds (S4804), and if it is determined that it is less than 5 seconds (S4804: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time is stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p. A remaining period A indicating that is short is set (S4805), and the process moves to S4809.

On the other hand, in the process of S4804, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation period is not less than 5 seconds (5 seconds or more) (S4804: No), then the remaining fluctuation period is 5 seconds or more and is less than 60 seconds. If it is determined that it is 5 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4806: Yes), period B indicating that it is a normal residual fluctuation time is stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p. The settings are made (S4807), and the process moves to S4809.

On the other hand, in the process of S4806, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is longer than 60 seconds (S4806: No), a period C indicating that the remaining variation time is long is set in the remaining time information storage area 223p (S4808). , the process moves to S4809. In this way, the variation time (remaining variation period) that will be executed when the special pattern variation restarts is calculated at the timing when the special pattern variation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special pattern variation time is interrupted), and the corresponding period is calculated. By setting the information to do so, it is possible to perform a performance (additional performance) suitable for the remaining fluctuation time without delay at the timing of restarting the special symbol fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period information (period A to period C) set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is made different depending on the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) to be executed when the special symbol fluctuation is restarted. However, the selection ratio of each period information is configured such that, for example, the shorter the remaining time, the easier it is to select period A, and the longer the remaining time, the easier it is to select period C. The remaining period may be configured to vary depending on the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided into predetermined intervals (for example, 30 seconds), and periods A to C may be distributed in order for each division. You may do so.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional performance executed based on the period information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p and the remaining variation time. It can provide the fun of predicting time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received (S4801: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4809). If it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4809: Yes), the process of changing the target of the above-mentioned processes of S4802 to S4808 from the first special symbol to the second special symbol is executed (S4810 to S4816), the process moves to S4817. After executing any of the processes in S4813, S4815, and S4816, or if it is determined that the special map 2 temporary stop command has not been received in the process in S4809 (S4809: No), the restart process (S4817) is executed. Execute and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the restart process (S4817) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the restart process (S4817). This restart process (S4817) is to execute a process to set the effect to be executed when the special figure 1 restart command is received.

When the restart process (S4817) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is on (S4901), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is off (S4901: No) , this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is on (S4901: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S4902), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is determined to be on (S4901: Yes). If it is determined that the restart command has been received (S4902: Yes), then the special map 1 temporary stop flag is set to OFF (S4903), and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p is read. (S4904), a fluctuation pattern is determined from the restart fluctuation pattern selection table 222b based on the read remaining time information (S4905), and a restart fluctuation pattern command for display corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set (S4906). Next, the information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is reset (S4907), and then the process moves to S4908. On the other hand, in the process of S4902, even when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S4902: No), the process proceeds to S4908.

In the process of S4908, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is on (S4908), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is off (S4908: No), this process is ended. do. On the other hand, in the process of S4908, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is on (S4901: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 restart command is received (S4909), and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is determined to be on (S4901: Yes). If it is determined that the restart command has been received (S4909: Yes), then the special map 2 temporary stop flag is set to OFF (S4910), and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time information storage area 223p is read. (S4911), a fluctuation pattern is determined from the restart fluctuation pattern selection table 222b based on the read remaining time information (S4912), and a display restart fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set (S4913). Next, the information set in the remaining time information storage area 223p is reset (S4914), and then this process ends.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when the special figure variation is interrupted, the special figure variation is resumed after the normal effect (the effect display that is executed when the special figure variation is started) ends. A shaking effect is performed in which the third symbol is displayed in a oscillating manner until the special figure change is restarted, and an additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (remaining change period) after restarting is executed. However, other configurations may be used.

For example, a performance period determining means for determining a normal performance period during which a normal performance is performed is provided, and when the performance period determination means determines that the normal performance period has ended, an additional performance may be executed. Good too. By configuring in this way, the normal performance and the additional performance can be executed continuously, so that it is possible to provide a more suitable performance display to the player. In addition, in this case, there may be an error between the end timing of the additional production period during which the additional production is executed and the special symbol fluctuation period after restarting, but the additional production will continue to be executed during the error period. Alternatively, a swinging effect may be performed in which the third symbol is displayed swinging. Furthermore, an error period determining means for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determining means determines that the error period is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an additional effect is performed again. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the hit-related process (S4220), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the contents of the win-related process (S4220). In this win-related process (S4220), in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a jackpot game or a small win game that is executed when a jackpot or small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery. This process corresponds to various commands sent from the main control device 110 when a jackpot or small win is won.

In addition, when receiving a prize ball number command to indicate the number of prize balls acquired during a winning game (big hit game, small winning game), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated, and A process for setting a command for the number of prize balls to be displayed based on the result is executed.

In the win-related process (S4220), first, it is determined whether the received command is a jackpot-related command by the command determination process (see FIG. 59) (S5001). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S5001: Yes), jackpot-related processing is executed (S5002), and then this processing is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the jackpot related process (S5002), which is one process in the win related process (S4220 in FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S5002). The jackpot-related process is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a jackpot game to be executed when a jackpot is won, and when a jackpot is won, the main control device Processing corresponding to various commands sent from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related processing (S5002), first, it is determined whether the winning-related command received by the winning-related processing (S5001 in FIG. 69) is a jackpot start command (S5101). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot start command (S5101: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S5102), and then this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 58). The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, it displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect that suggests the start of a jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5101: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S5103). If it is determined that the number of rounds command has been received (S5103: Yes), a number of rounds command for display is set based on the number of rounds (S5104), and then this process ends. Note that in this embodiment, since information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, if the main control device 110 transmits information indicating that a new round has started as a round update command, the voice lamp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the 113, a round number accumulation counter is provided that accumulates the number of received round update commands. The configuration may be such that the number is calculated and a display round number command is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S5103: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received (S5105). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S5105: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S5105, if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S5105: Yes), the process moves to S5106.

In the process of S5106, it is determined whether the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 1 or more (S5106), and if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is less than 1 (that is, 0). If it is determined that there is (Yes) (S5106: No), an ending command including RUSH is set (S5107), and then this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5106, if it is determined that the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223c is 1 or more (S5106: Yes), the right-handed ball flag 223j is set to ON (S5108), and the dash is included. An ending command is set (S5109), and then this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 69, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5001, if it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot related command (S5001: No), it is determined whether the received command is a small win related command (S5003). If it is determined that the received command is a small win related command (S5003: Yes), small win related processing (S5004) is executed, and then this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, the small win related process (S5004) which is one process in the win related process (S4220 in FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process (S5004). The small hit related process is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small win game that is executed when the small win is won. , processes corresponding to various commands sent from the main controller 110 are executed.

In the small win related process (S5004), first, it is determined whether the win related command received in the win related process (S4220 in FIG. 69) is a small win start command (S5201). In the process of S5201, if it is determined that the small win start command has been received (S5201: Yes), a small win start command for display is set (S5202), and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5201, if it is determined that the received command is not a small hit start command (S5201: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S5203). If it is determined that the received command is not an ending command (S5203: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S5203: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S5204), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 69, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5003, if it is determined that the received command is not a small hit related command (S5003: No), then it is determined whether or not a prize ball command has been received (S5005). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S5005: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S5005: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of a prize ball counter (not shown) (S5006), A prize ball number command for display corresponding to the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition is set (S5007), and then this process ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the status command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64), the period until the normal state or the variable probability state is set (advantageous continuation period) The prize ball number counter is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls commands received during the game. The number of prize balls corresponding to the accumulated value of the prize ball number counter is displayed during a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) or during a probability state.

With this configuration, it is easy for the player to understand the cumulative number of balls acquired during the period (advantageous continuation period) after the potential state is set until the normal state (variable state) is set again. Can be notified.

In this embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is configured to be displayed during the advantageous continuation period, but it is also possible to notify the player of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period. For example, the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game and the number of prize balls obtained in the small win game may be displayed separately during the advantageous continuation period. In this case, the winning game state (medium jackpot, medium winning) at the time of receiving the prize ball command is determined based on the information set in the subordinate state setting area 223k, and the number of prize balls is accumulated for each determination result. It is good to have a means. Thereby, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuous period can be easily classified.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls acquired during one game period within the advantageous continuation period (the combined period of the jackpot game period and the potential state period until the next jackpot game is executed) is accumulated and displayed. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is preferable to provide a storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls acquired within one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage means as history.

In addition, as mentioned above, when using a configuration that cumulatively displays the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, the number of times the special symbol lottery result was a lottery result (big hit, small hit) that was advantageous to the player. It may also be configured to display the lottery probability that the special symbol lottery result is a lottery result (big hit, small win) that is advantageous to the player.

With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the lottery results of special symbols executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period. can be made to do so.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability state is configured to continue unless a jackpot of a special symbol is won while the probability state is set, and the small winning game is not performed during the probability state. It is configured so that it is easy to win (the special drawing 2 lottery is easily executed). Therefore, during the advantageous continuation period, the player plays the game with the expectation that in addition to winning the jackpot for which the advantageous continuation period will be set again, the player will not win the jackpot for a long period of time. I will do it.

In such a case, the player can understand how the actual game content (special drawing 2 lottery result) is compared to the jackpot winning probability and the small winning winning probability that are preset in the pachinko machine 10. It is preferable to configure the display mode so that the display mode is displayed in the following manner. By using such a configuration, for example, since the actual probability of winning a jackpot is lower than the preset probability of winning a jackpot, the number of small winning games executed during the probability state increases, and many prize balls can be played. If you are able to win the small prize, the actual probability of winning the small winning is higher than the preset probability of winning the small winning, so the number of small winning games executed during the probability state will increase and you will win many prize balls. It is possible to analyze the cases in which the player is able to distinguish between the cases in which the game is successful and the cases in which the game is successful. Therefore, by having the player analyze the number of prize balls acquired during the continuous advantageous period, it is possible to make the player interested in the game content and make it easier to continue playing the game.

Furthermore, if the game content (special symbol lottery results) during the advantageous continuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, a notification means may be provided to notify the fulfillment of the condition to indicate that, for example, if a jackpot is won. A condition achievement notification may be executed to indicate that the number of special symbol drawings executed up to now (so-called number of hooks) has exceeded a predetermined number (100 times), or a condition achievement notification may be executed between small winnings. Condition achievement notification may be performed to indicate that the number of special symbol drawings (the number of drawings of special symbol 2) has exceeded a predetermined number (10 times). Further, a condition achievement notification may be executed to indicate that the number of prize balls acquired within one game pattern exceeds a predetermined number (5000).

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 72) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 72) is based on the first or special pattern 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of setting a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Furthermore, based on the extracted stop type (Jackpot A to Jackpot D), a process is executed to set a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5301). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223e is off (S5301: No), it means that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S5305. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223e is on (S5301: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S5302).

Then, in the process of S4302 of the special figure 1 variation start process (see S4202 of FIG. 60) executed in the command determination process (see S4111 of FIG. 59), the variation extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 Based on the variation pattern related to production, a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is set (S5303), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223c is subtracted by 1 (S5304), The process moves to S5305 for setting the variable display regarding the 2 special symbols (special symbol 2).

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5303 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 58) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 58). Ru. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the gaming state.

Next, the processing of S5305 to S5308 in FIG. 72 will be explained. The processing of S5305 to S5308 is different from the processing of S5301 to S5304 in FIG. 72 described above in that the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and other than that are the same. Therefore, detailed explanation will be omitted.

When the process of S5305 is executed, it is first determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S5305), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (S5305: No), the process of S5309 is executed. Move to. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to on in the process of S5305 (S5305: Yes), the special map 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S5306), and the second fluctuation pattern command is set based on the extracted fluctuation pattern command. A special symbol display variation pattern command is set (S5307), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223d is subtracted by 1 (S5308), and the process moves to step 5309.

In the process of S5309, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on (S5309), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (S5309 :No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to on (S5309: Yes), the special map 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special map 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to off (S5310), and the extracted stop type is set as is (S5311), the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5312), and this process is ended.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the lottery for the first special symbol can be performed more quickly than the lottery for the first special symbol. The lottery with the second special symbol is configured so that it is easier to win a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, winning a small hit or shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player).

Then, the type of special symbol that is likely to be drawn by lottery is configured to be variable according to the set gaming state, and when a specific first gaming state (for example, a potential state) is set, a second special symbol is selected. The lottery is configured to be easily executed, and if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the first game state, the first game state is set again.

Furthermore, in order to make it easier for the second special symbol to be drawn during the potential state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, a normal state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, is similarly set. Also, since the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, a long variable time (10 minutes) is set in order to suppress the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed frequently during the normal state. It is configured so that

However, in the gaming machine configured in this way, during the normal state, it is possible to carry out a lottery of the second special symbol, although it is inefficient, and if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, There is a problem in that a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is given.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery when the normal state is set, the second special symbol lottery is forced to stop or temporarily stopped due to a miss. Therefore, it is set so that it is difficult for the second special symbol to win a jackpot when the normal state is set.

In addition, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, when a ball passes through a specific area provided in the winning device during a jackpot game executed based on winning a jackpot, a special It may be configured such that a high probability state of the symbol is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, three gaming states (normal state, potential state, variable probability state) can be set, but four game states (normal state, probable state) can be set. , a variable probability state, a time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), or two or less.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured to be able to be executed simultaneously, and the lottery for the second special symbol that is likely to win a small hit is performed in a specific game state. Although the configuration is configured to facilitate execution in the (potential state), other configurations may be used. For example, the first ball entry opening 64 is provided in the left area, and the electric accessory 640a is provided in the right area. A first ball entry port with an attached ball and a second ball entry port 640 without an electric accessory 640a are provided so that when a variable probability state is set, playing a right-handed game is the most advantageous game for the player. It may be configured as follows.

When configured in this way, during the normal state, as in the first embodiment described above, it is set so that the variation time of the special figure 1 variation is more likely to be shorter than the special figure 2 variation, and during the potential state. As in the first embodiment described above, the special figure 2 variation is set so that a shorter variation time is more likely to be set than the special figure 1 variation, and the electric accessory 640a is not released in the variable probability state and time saving state. It is best to set it so that it is easy.

As a result, during the normal state, a left-handed game is used to play a game aiming for a jackpot by drawing the first special symbol, and during a time-saving state, a right-handed game is used to draw the first special symbol more efficiently than during the normal state. During the probability change state, play a game aiming for a jackpot by drawing the first special symbol more efficiently and with higher probability than in the normal state by right-handed playing, and play a game aiming for a jackpot. In this state, a right-handed game can be used to play a game aiming at a big win or a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol.

<About the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration. , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S6101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the command to be executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S6101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a predetermined amount of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S6101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the process of S6102 and S6102 multiple times, the process of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 73. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer (see S7502 in FIG. 85(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)), a simple Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable production is issued. If a display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation is displayed. Can perform. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, and since it takes time to transfer the data, the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, so that immediately after the power is turned on, for example, when the power is restored, To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75(b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75(b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is used as the third symbol instead of the power-on image. In order to display the command on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview effect and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 27, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S6307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (jackpot A, jackpot B, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete miss) indicated by the display stop type command is detected. The corresponding stop type table and stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process moves to S6304.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). FIG. 77(a) is a flowchart showing the variable pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made several seconds or more apart, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command may change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to actually display fluctuations that are longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is extracted, and at the same time, the content is transferred to the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data has been set in the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 76. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of jackpot A to G, small hit A to C, out of reach, or completely out) indicated by the display stop type command is created. (S6601), compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed, and displays the stop type in the third symbol display device. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. It is set to on (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S6602 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S6603, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss, in reality, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), opening command processing is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display command is If there is an ending command (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a display variation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display If there is a fluctuation stop command (S6414: Yes), the fluctuation stop command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80(a). FIG. 80(a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

This display variation stop command is the end timing of the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 73), that is, the end timing of each special symbol in the main control device 110. A display stop command ( The normal stop command) and various display commands set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the audio lamp control device 113 are shown.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to independently (in parallel) execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, and further , when one special symbol is stopped (determined) and displayed as a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a jackpot), the other special symbol that is fluctuating is changed to the end of a predetermined fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Regardless of the presence or absence of the error, the system is configured to forcibly stop and display a symbol indicating a failure.

Then, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command set to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the special symbol from the main control device 110, it executes the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70). , a display command (forced (stop command).

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the above-mentioned normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The configuration is such that a stop display is executed based on a forced stop command received later. That is, the forced stop command is configured to be processed with priority over the normal stop command. Thereby, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be reliably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the control content of the main controller 110.

In addition, the display variation stop command also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop that is set in the variation stop processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S4214 in FIG. 65). When a (temporary stop command for display) is received, a data table is determined in which display data in which a symbol to be stopped and displayed slightly oscillates is set as the variable stop display data.

In the fluctuation stop command processing, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6931, time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6933). S6934). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6935), the fluctuation stop command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification command is determined. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), display notification command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the notification command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing. This notification command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the audio lamp control device 113.

This notification command is one of the various notification commands that are set when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal conditions set in the main control device 110 and is output to the display control device 114. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives a display notification command.

In the notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In addition, in this embodiment, among the various notification commands set by the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 discriminates only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and related commands such as light emitting commands other than display commands, voice output commands, and accessory drive commands are also received once, and the display control device 114 processes them. The configuration may be such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device with information added to indicate the data content (display mode) set in .

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and the rear image is changed. If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 81(a). FIG. 81(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to on (S7001), which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back side A, B), the bit corresponding to the back side image type indicated by the back side image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the changed back image type is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified that either the back surface A or B should be displayed according to the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, based on the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM type ( (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 76. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and if there is an error command, it is determined that there is no command. If (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81(b). FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S7102, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 76. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), the processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are selected from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77(b)), which are the processing corresponding to each command. Performs processing to discard the command without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) that is executed in this case, in the process of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7201: No ), it is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process skips steps S7202 to S7204, and proceeds to the process S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing.

In the warning image setting process, after the process in S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 82. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), then the process moves to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 82, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7206, as well as the warning image developed earlier, and , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the performance time of the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag is on or not. (S7209).

As a result, if the final display flag is off (S7209: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. setting (S7210), and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state (S7214), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returning to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7215, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so a certain period of time has elapsed since the end of the confirmed display effect. Later, processing for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration performance is in progress is set to ON (S7221), and this process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable production is not received after the confirmed display production is finished, the demonstration production will be automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can set the content of the drawing.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image ends, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined period of time. A process is performed in which a display data table specifying that the image of is to be displayed in a stopped state is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. First, FIG. 85(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off (S7501: No), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 85(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not finished (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process in S7601, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed with . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not finished (S7706: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process moves to S7707. Further, as a result of the process in S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag 233w to off (S7710), the Among the back image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process moves to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the displayed stop type information is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 is Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instructions set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 27) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (the storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process in S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images. In addition, in this 1st Embodiment, although the variable display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol can be performed simultaneously in parallel, it is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in a state where one variable display is being executed, other variable displays may not be executed. When there are held balls, a configuration may be adopted in which the variable display is performed in order from the held balls with the oldest starting winnings in terms of time. With this configuration, control can be simplified and processing load can be reduced.

As explained above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and the normal state of normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, and high probability state of normal symbols) There are four game states: short-time state (low probability state for special symbols and high probability state for normal symbols), and potential state (high probability state for special symbols and normal state for normal symbols). There is. The system is configured such that the potential state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

<About the modification of the first embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed when the potential state is set, and when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, By forcibly stopping the fluctuating first special symbol in a display mode that shows it as a miss, or by configuring the subtraction of the fluctuating time to be temporarily interrupted (until the small winning game ends), the second special symbol Although the lottery is configured to be easily executed, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the following configuration may be used.

The jackpot probability of the special symbol is always constant regardless of the game state, and the first ball entrance, which triggers the change of the first special symbol, is placed in a position where a left-handed game ball can enter, and the right-handed game ball is placed in a position where a left-handed game ball can enter. A right first ball entry port corresponding to the first special symbol and a right second ball entry port corresponding to the second special symbol are arranged in an area where the game ball can enter. In the mouth, when the game ball passes through the through gate that allows the game ball hit to the right to pass through, there is an electric motor that opens the second right ball entrance, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance than in the closed state. Arrange and compose the accessories.

In the normal game state (low probability, non-electronic support (probability of normal symbol is low probability)), enter the game ball into the first ball entry hole to perform the game with left-handed batting, and enter the first special symbol. A game is played by drawing lots. The lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, and after the jackpot game, the probability of the normal symbol becomes high, and when the time-saving game state (game state with electric support) where the electric accessories are likely to be in the open state, hit right and play the game. By doing this, it becomes possible to play the game by entering the game ball into the first right ball entrance and the second right ball entrance, and the lottery game with the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed at the same time. It becomes possible to be With the second special symbol, the probability of winning a small win is set higher than with the first special symbol, and a small win game is executed in which the V winning area is opened to the V winning device formed in the variable winning device. It is configured to be easy to use. In addition, when small hit B (small hit A and small hit B are set) is executed, the first special symbol that is changing is configured to be forcibly terminated (forcibly set to the result of determination of failure). has been done.

Here, in the modified example, the jackpot game executed when the game ball passes through the V winning area due to the small win game is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game executed when the first special symbol hits the jackpot. It is set to be a big hit. Here, for the jackpot executed when the game ball passes through the V winning area, the selection ratio of the jackpot in which a time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game is set higher than that of the jackpot of the first special symbol. It should be noted that the number of rounds may be set to be greater than the jackpot of the first special symbol so that the jackpot that is executed passing through the V winning area becomes advantageous.

In this way, even with so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed gaming machines, fluctuations in jackpots that are disadvantageous to the player can be forcibly stopped by a small hit or a big hit on one side, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make it easier to receive a jackpot.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 100. In the second embodiment, the type of gaming state set according to the special symbol lottery result, the configuration of the main control device 110, and the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment. They are different.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot won. Specifically, jackpot A, which is won only in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), is set to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game, and jackpots B and C are set to a probability state after the end of the jackpot game. be done. The jackpot D won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is configured to be set in a probability state after the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, as described above, the first embodiment is a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variation machine) that simultaneously (in parallel) executes the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. ), and if a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery will be discarded (forced stop due to loss) or interrupted (temporary suspension), depending on the type of small win. It is configured to do so.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, irrespective of the winning type of jackpot, if a jackpot is won with the first special symbol, a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if a jackpot of the first special symbol is won during the probability variation state, a probability state is set as the game state at the start of the variation, and a small winning game (small winning RUSH) is set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 88, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the game when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in a state where the probability variable state is set. As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a state where the probability variable state is set, from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts (see FIG. 88(c)), and either A potential state is set during a period (symbol confirmation period) until a jackpot game with a special symbol is executed.

Then, in the state where the probability state is set, a game for drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed, similarly to the first embodiment described above. In addition, if you win a small hit on special pattern 2 while the pattern on special pattern 1 is changing, the measurement (subtraction) of the symbol variation time on special pattern 1 will be interrupted (temporary stop) during the period when the small winning game is being executed, or , it is configured to be discarded (forcibly stopped when it comes off). In addition, in the second embodiment, different variable times are easily set depending on the jackpot type of the first special symbol. Therefore, depending on the selected variation pattern, there is a possibility that the jackpot variation cannot be interrupted or canceled due to the small hit of the second special symbol. As a result, the player desires that a long period be set as the period in which the potential state is set, and therefore desires that a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation period be selected.

As shown with reference to FIG. 88, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, at the end of the jackpot, a screen notifying the player that the gaming state will be in the variable probability state (challenge mode) is displayed. 3 is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 88(a)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 89(a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be explained. FIG. 89(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 89(a), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment "Challenge mode entered!!" indicating that a variable probability state will be set after the jackpot game is finished is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, a character 811 that is displayed during a period in which the variable probability state or the probability state is set is displayed. This character 811 is configured so that it does not appear (is not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the period in which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is A gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state is created.

In addition, a comment "Aim for RUSH!!" is displayed in the main display area Dm to aim for the potential state to be set. Further, in the guide display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, characters "left-handed hit" are displayed as a guide display mode for making the player play a left-handed game. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that when a variable probability state is set, the player will play a left side game aiming at the left side area.

Moreover, "555" is displayed in the small display area Dm1 as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (ending screen being displayed). In addition, in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, "-" is displayed as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. Then, "0" indicating that there is no reserved ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in the small display region Dm1a and the small display region Dm2a, respectively.

Returning to FIG. 88, the explanation will be continued. In a state where the probability variable state is set as the game state (see FIG. 88(b)), the game state is such that it is easy to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by playing the left-handed game. In other words, the variable probability state is a state where the electric accessory 64a is easy to open because the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the ball is easy to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during this probability change state will be explained with reference to FIG. 89(b). FIG. 89(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the variable probability state. As shown in FIG. 89(b), the comment "In the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is a variable state is displayed in the sub-display area Ds so as to scroll horizontally (from right to left). Ru.

In the main display area Dm, an effect in which the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right) is displayed. Then, "Left hit" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3, and a fluctuating display indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating is displayed in the small display area Dm1. Furthermore, at this point, the second special symbol has not been newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 88(b) (because the ball has not entered the second ball entrance 640 due to the right-handed game). , the non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a plurality of movement display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the variable probability state, and the lottery result (property judgment result) of the first special symbol in the variable probability state is stored. ) The motion display pattern of the character 811 is configured to be set differently depending on the character 811. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol will win the jackpot during the probability change state.

Returning to FIG. 88, the explanation will be continued. After the display screen shown in FIG. 89(b) is displayed, when a variable display is executed to show that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the jackpot, the display shown in FIG. 90(a) is executed. The screen will be displayed. FIG. 90(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the fluctuating display of winning the jackpot is started in the probability variable state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the gaming state changes at the timing when the variable display indicating that the first special symbol has won a jackpot is started during the probability variable state (see FIG. 88(c)). It is configured to transition from a variable state to a potential state.

Therefore, since the gaming state shifts to a state advantageous for the player (potential state) at the timing when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the first special symbol fluctuates and is displayed in the small display area Dm1 of the display screen. While the variable display mode indicating that the game is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect pattern 816 (display mode of "333") for indicating to the player that the gaming state has shifted is displayed in a stopped state. . As a result, the player can be made to think that the gaming state has shifted from the variable probability state to the potential state due to the stopped display of the performance symbols 816. In addition, in the second embodiment, since the same display mode as the third symbol is used as the production symbol display mode, the production symbol display mode that is stopped and displayed indicates the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be made to think that the display mode is Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "RUSH enters!! Hit right!!" to indicate that the potential state is set as the gaming state is displayed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the first special symbol winning the jackpot starts changing, the performance pattern displayed in the main display area Dm is stopped without changing the performance mode of the special pattern 1 display area Dm1. Since it is configured to be displayed, it is possible to make the player think that the gaming state has changed according to the lottery result of the performance symbol.

Then, during the potential state in which the right-handed game is continuously being executed (while the first special symbol is changing the jackpot), if a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 90(b). As expected, a performance mode is displayed to indicate that the player has won a small prize. Here, the display contents when the potential state is set will be explained with reference to FIG. 90(b). FIG. 90(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the potential state.

According to FIG. 90(b), when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the state where the potential state is set (during RUSH), the small display area Dm1 is displayed in the ``541'' is displayed to indicate that the variation of the 1 special symbol has been discarded (forcibly stopped due to a miss), and the special symbol 2 display area Dm2 indicates that a small hit has been won. The display mode “246” is displayed. Furthermore, in the small display area Dm7, "V x 3" indicating the number of small winnings is displayed, and in the small display area Dm8, the elapsed time "01:50" since this probability state was set is displayed. be done.

Then, a treasure box 817 displayed as a performance mode during RUSH is opened, and a "V" for indicating a small win is displayed as a performance pattern 818 for indicating a game result from inside. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the player will win a small win with the second special symbol during the rush state and that the small win game will be executed.

Further, a star mark 819 is displayed around the production pattern 818. This star mark 819 is a display mode indicating that the current small win has forced the player to stop the jackpot fluctuation that would result in winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. With this configuration, the player can feel relieved and can concentrate more on right-handed games.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the star mark 819 is displayed to indicate the variation result of the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. 818 may be displayed to be variable. Further, it may be configured to display not only the fluctuation result but also the remaining fluctuation period of the discarded first special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a variety of performances to the players.

Furthermore, in order to inform the player of the state of the first special symbol in an easy-to-understand manner during the probability state, the performance contents are varied and displayed depending on the state of the first special symbol, such as when it is not changing, when it is changing out, when it is changing the jackpot, etc. You may. For example, the color of the "right-handed" guidance display in the small display area Dm3 may be varied or may be displayed blinking. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a game that is easier to understand for the player.

In addition, in this second embodiment, the right second variable prize winning device 650, which is rotated when a small win is won, is provided in the right side area, and the same gaming method as in the potential state (right hit) is provided. It is configured so that you can play games. With this configuration, even if small winning games are frequently executed during the probability state, the player only has to continue playing the right-handed game, so it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts during the probability change state, the probability state is set from the start of the jackpot variation, and the probability state is set from the start of the jackpot variation. In the state where the sure state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, the system was configured to notify the player of the period in which the probable state will be set at the same time as the probable state is set (based on the fact that the probable state has been set) (Fig. 90(a) ))reference. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, since it is possible to change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the first special symbol also changes in the state where the probability change state is set. Both of the second special symbols may also vary.

In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the potential state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the potential state is set (see FIG. 90(a)), the second Until the special symbols stop changing, it is not possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the potential state, and a problem arises in which the small winning game is not executed for any length of time even in the RUSH state. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the conditions for transition to the potential state are satisfied (when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability variable state), the fluctuation situation of the second special symbol (the fluctuation The configuration is configured so that the timing of notifying that the RUSH state has been set is varied based on the determination result.

Here, with reference to FIG. 88 and FIG. 91, when the conditions for transition to the probability state are satisfied (when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability variable state), the second special symbol ( The content of the effect when the special figure 2) is changing will be explained. As shown in FIG. 88, if the second special symbol is changing at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in a state where the probability variable state is set (see (c) in FIG. 88), the probability variable state is set. Rather than the "challenge mode" for indicating the state, a "super challenge mode" is displayed that increases the expectation that the RUSH state will be set.

When the "super challenge mode" is set, a comment indicating that the mode is the "super challenge mode" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed moving at a higher speed than in FIG. 89(b), so that the character 811 moving at high speed can easily find the treasure box 816.

Then, in the small display area Dm1, a "fluctuating display mode" to show that the first special symbol is changing is displayed, and in the small display area Dm2, the state before the potential state is set is displayed. The "fluctuation display mode" that has been fluctuating from that point on is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 88, the explanation will be continued. The display screen of the "super challenge mode" shown in FIG. 91(a) is displayed until the timing when the special drawing 2 variation, which is executed across the timing of transitioning the gaming state from the probability variation state to the probability variation state, ends. When the special figure 2 variation ends (see FIG. 88(d)), a "RUSH" entry screen is displayed to notify the player that the "RUSH" has entered (see FIG. 91(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 91(b), the contents of the screen when entering "RUSH" via "Super Challenge Mode" will be explained. FIG. 91(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen when entering "RUSH" via "Super Challenge Mode". As shown in FIG. 91(b), in the main display area Dm, a performance pattern 813 is displayed from inside the treasure box 817, and a display mode is displayed to notify the player that the game has entered the "RUSH" state. Then, "Right hit" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to guide the game method during the rush game. At this point, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a variation display mode to suggest that the first special symbol is changing (changing the jackpot), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 shows a loss. The display mode "435" is stopped and displayed.

Returning to FIG. 88, the explanation will be continued. During a rush game (RUSH), that is, during a potential state, a right-handed game is performed to frequently draw a second special symbol in which a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is set. .

Therefore, during the rush game, the small win is won with a probability of 1/2, and the variation of the first special symbol can be interrupted or discarded by the small win game. However, once the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts, the variation pattern is configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot, so if a short variation pattern is selected, the jackpot variation will be discarded due to a small hit. Can not do it. This prevents the player from winning an unfavorable jackpot in the rush game, and allows the player to play the rush game while worrying whether or not he or she can win the most advantageous jackpot.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 have been changed. Other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable probability/potential table 202ad2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the probability change/potential table 202ad2 has the same jackpot operation as the jackpot type defined in the probability change/potential table 202d (see FIG. 14(a)) of the first embodiment described above. The contents are prescribed, and the setting contents of the time saving flag 203m and probability change flag 203g are prescribed for each jackpot type.

The difference is that the gaming states of jackpot B and jackpot C of the probability change/potential probability table 202ad2 of the first embodiment described above are different after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, for jackpot B and jackpot C, the time saving flag 203m is set to OFF, and the potential state is set after the jackpot game ends. In the second embodiment, the time saving flag 203m is configured to be set to ON. In other words, in the second embodiment, if a jackpot of the first special symbol is won when a variable probability state or a probability state is set, after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the jackpot type, A variable state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the contents of the probability variation table 202ae2 will be explained. FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table 202ae2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the time saving/probability variation table 202ae2 is different from the time saving/probability variation table 202e2 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 17(a)) in that the time saving/probability variation table 202ae2 has a length of variation pattern corresponding to the special drawing 1. They are different in that they have different characteristics. Other than that, it is the same as the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19(a)). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) as the symbol type is "Jackpot A", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 159". A short variation with a variation time of 0.1 seconds is defined in association with a range of "160 to 196", a middle variation with a variation time of 2 seconds is defined in association with a range of "197 to 198", and a variation in a range of "197 to 198" is defined. A long variation with a time of 600 seconds is defined in association.

In the second embodiment, as described above, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won during the variable probability state, the probability state is set as the gaming state and a right-handed game is executed. Then, if you win "Jackpot A" during the probability variation state, the short variation (0.1 seconds) is likely to be selected as the variation pattern, and even if you execute the special map 2 game in a hurry, you will almost certainly win the first one. I won a jackpot with a special symbol. Therefore, jackpot A is the jackpot that is most disadvantageous to the player.

Next, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) as the symbol type is “Jackpot B”, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 4” for a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds. Short fluctuations are defined in correspondence with each other, middle fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds are defined in the range of "5 to 41", and long fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds are defined in the range of "42 to 198". It is specified as follows.

Jackpot B is structured so that the middle fluctuation is likely to be selected as the fluctuation pattern. As mentioned above, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol during the potential state is set to 1 second regardless of the lottery result (see Figure 17(b)), so it is more likely to win a small hit than a jackpot A. It has become a jackpot that is easy to discard.

Next, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) as the symbol type is “Jackpot C”, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 1” for a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds. Short fluctuations are defined in correspondence with each other, middle fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds are defined in the range of "2 to 5", and long fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds are defined in the range of "6 to 198". It is specified as follows.

As described above, the configuration is such that when jackpot C is won, a long variation of 600 seconds is likely to be executed as the variation pattern. During the long fluctuation of 600 seconds, if the second special symbol changes for 1 second, you will win a small hit with a probability of 1/2, so it is possible to reliably discard this jackpot, and it is the easiest jackpot to discard. It is a type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 94 is a game flow showing the flow of the game according to the second embodiment. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, when the fluctuation of the jackpot starts in the drawing of the first special symbol, the state shifts to a 100% probability state. do. The rest of the game flow is the same as in the first embodiment, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<About the control process executed by the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99, the control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be explained as compared to the control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences between the two. The second embodiment is largely different from the first embodiment described above in that it is possible to set the game state from the probability variable state to the potential state as the gaming state when the first special symbol starts changing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 95, the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) will be explained. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231). This first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) is a first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331) in contrast to the first special symbol variation start process (see S210 in FIG. 30) of the first embodiment described above. , and after executing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), the game state update process (S332) is executed.Other than that, they are the same, so they are given the same reference numerals. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331), which is one process in the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231), will be explained. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331). This first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331) is different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 31) of the first embodiment described above, in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot. The difference is that when , the process of setting the gaming state to the definite state is executed, and the rest is the same, so the same reference numerals are given and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S331), after acquiring the current lottery result in the process of S403 or S404, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203n for the second special symbol is on (S451). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is on (S451: Yes), a missed symbol is set in the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 (S409), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S451 that the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203n is not on (S451: No), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a jackpot (S405). If it is determined that it is a jackpot (S405: Yes), the above-described processes of S406 to S408 are executed, and then the time saving flag 203m is set to OFF (S452), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the contents of the game state update process (S332), which is one process in the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S231), will be explained. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gaming state update process (S332). This game state update process (S332) updates the game state at the start of variation of the first special symbol, and executes a process to set a command to be sent to the audio lamp control device.

In the game state update process (S332), first, it is determined whether the time saving flag 203m is on (S651). If it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is on (S651: Yes), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving flag 203m is not on (S651: No), it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on (S652). If it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (S652: Yes), a status command indicating the probability state is set (S653), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not on (S652: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S654), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S232) will be explained. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S232). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S232) differs from the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S209 in FIG. 34) in that it does not execute the special symbol 2 temporary stop processing (S803), and the jackpot of special symbol 2. The difference is that the process of discarding (S809 to S811) is not executed. Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the contents of the jackpot ending process 2 (S2551) will be explained. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 2 (S2551). Jackpot end processing 2 (S2551) is different from the jackpot end processing (S2512) of the first embodiment described above, when the gaming state is a probability state, winning one of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. The difference is that a process for setting a variable probability state is then executed. Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot end process 2 (S2551), after executing the processes of S2701 to S2704 described above, it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a probability state (S2751). When it is determined that the gaming state is a potential state (S2751: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is D (S2752). If the current jackpot type is jackpot D (S2752: Yes), the time saving flag 203m is set to OFF in order to set the probability state to the gaming state (S2753), and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON ( S2754), a command indicating a change in the gaming state is set (S2709), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not D (S2752: No), the time saving flag 203m and the probability variable flag 203g are set to ON in order to set the gaming state to a variable probability state (S2706), and the above-mentioned The process of S2709 is executed, and this process ends.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be explained. The explanation will focus on the differences. The control process executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the second embodiment is different from the control process executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above, and is different from the fluctuation stop process (S4214 in FIG. 65). The difference is that a fluctuation stop process 2 (see S4251 in FIG. 100) is executed instead of (see S4251 in FIG. 100). The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the fluctuation stop processing 2 (S4251) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. In the fluctuation stop processing 2 (S4251), in contrast to the fluctuation stop processing (S4214) of the first embodiment, when the special chart 1 fluctuation stop command is received during the probability state, the display corresponding to the current lottery result is The difference is that a command setting process (S4751) is added. With this configuration, the lottery result of the forcedly stopped first special symbol can be clearly communicated to the player. Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment described above, the gaming state is a variable probability state, and if a jackpot is won due to the fluctuation of the first special symbol during the variable probability state, at the start of the fluctuation (start of jackpot fluctuation), the time saving By setting the flag 203m to OFF, a potential state is set, and a small win RUSH is set in which a small win game is executed until the variation of the first special symbol is completed.

Further, when the first special symbol wins a jackpot and a potential state is set, a special figure 2 game (right-handed game) is executed. Then, by winning the small hit of the second special symbol, it is possible to temporarily stop the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, or forcefully stop it due to a miss, until the jackpot of the second special symbol is won. Alternatively, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol cannot be discarded, and a potential state is set until the fluctuation stops.

In addition to such a configuration, a variable probability ending condition and a potential ending condition (for example, the number of fluctuations of special pattern 1, the number of fluctuations of special pattern 2, the number of small winnings, etc.) are set, and when the conditions are met, It may be configured to end the potential state and transition to the normal state. In addition, the end condition (for example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the potential end condition) is notified to the player, and the player can judge the playing situation and play from the special figure 2 game to the special figure 1 game (left-handed game). It may also be configured to switch to a game (game). By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to provide a variety of gaming features and improve the interest of the game.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 112. In the third embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13, the type of gaming state set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the configuration of the main controller 110, and the audio lamp control are explained. The configuration of the device 113 is different.

In the first embodiment described above, it is configured such that a small win is won only in the lottery of the second special symbol, and when a specific small win (small win A) is won (the special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a small win). If the first special symbol that is fluctuating is forcibly stopped in a display mode that indicates a loss (when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed), and another small win (small win B) is won, the first special symbol that is fluctuating is forced to stop. It was configured to interrupt time subtraction.

Then, when the probability state is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and by making small winnings occur frequently during the probability state, it is possible to encourage the player. It was configured so that prize balls could be awarded based on the number of players. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, after a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol and a jackpot game is executed, it is configured to easily shift to a probability state, and the number of times the probability state is set is set to an upper limit. is set, and when the upper limit is reached, the normal state is set regardless of the type of jackpot won.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a small hit can be won in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and if one special symbol wins a small prize (special symbol). When a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates that the lottery result of a symbol is a small hit), the fluctuation of the other special symbol that is being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss. It is composed of

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to forcibly make the other special symbol change out of the lottery no matter which special symbol is drawn. Further, since the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped by the small win of the first special symbol, even if the special symbol wins the jackpot, the jackpot game can be prevented from being executed.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when a specific gaming state (for example, potential state) is set, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are both likely to be executed. However, when a specific gaming state is set, control is executed to forcibly stop one jackpot fluctuation due to the other small winning. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a specific gaming state from ending due to a jackpot win, and to continue a potential state for a long period of time.

In addition, in the third embodiment, there are a plurality of variation pattern tables that are referred to when setting the variation pattern of each special symbol, and the variation patterns defined in each variation pattern table are different. . Specifically, the length of the variation pattern (variation time) that is set when winning a jackpot is different from the length of the variation pattern (variation time) that is set when winning a small win.

With this configuration, even if the probability of winning a jackpot or winning a small win in a special symbol lottery is the same in the game state, it is possible to vary the probability of actually executing a jackpot game. can. For example, when a fluctuation pattern table in which a long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) is likely to be set as a fluctuation pattern set as a jackpot fluctuation of a special symbol, a 10-minute jackpot fluctuation is set as one of the special symbol fluctuations. When executed, it becomes possible to execute a large number of other special symbol drawings during the special symbol variation. Then, by winning a small hit in the other special symbol lottery, the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol is forcibly stopped, making it difficult to play the jackpot game of the special symbol. Similarly, if a fluctuation pattern table in which a short fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is likely to be set as a fluctuation pattern set as a jackpot fluctuation of a special symbol is referenced, the fluctuation pattern is executed during the special symbol fluctuation. Since the number of times the other special symbol is drawn is reduced, it becomes easier to play a special symbol jackpot game.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern set as the small hit variation of the special symbol can be selected from a plurality of variation patterns (variation time) similarly to the variation pattern set as the jackpot variation described above. By setting a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the small winning fluctuation, it is possible to make it easier to play the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, when the probability state is set as the gaming state, it becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed. Once the potential state is set, the potential state is configured not to end unless a jackpot game with a special symbol is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to play a game in a potential state for a long period of time by winning a small win in the lottery of each special symbol and suppressing the execution of a jackpot game.

In this way, by forcibly stopping the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol (making it a loss) due to the small winning of the other special symbol, a game feature is used that continues a potential state advantageous to the player. As a result, even during the jackpot fluctuations, the player can be motivated to play a game (a game in which a special symbol is drawn by drawing a special symbol that is not during the jackpot fluctuations), so that the performance of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when a display mode for indicating that a small hit has been won is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a special It is configured to be able to display a suggestion that can suggest to the player the actual lottery result of the symbol variation and the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation.

Specifically, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it sets a display variation pattern command to be transmitted to the display control device 114, and , a fluctuation information storage means is provided that temporarily stores fluctuation information (special symbol lottery results, fluctuation time, etc.) included in the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110, and then the special symbol that is being fluctuated is forced. Among the commands (fluctuating stop commands) to stop the special symbols that are changing based on a small hit win, when receiving a command (fluctuating stop command when small winnings occur) , to the display control device 114, along with a display command for forcibly stopping and displaying the special symbol in progress in a display mode that indicates a miss, stop fluctuation information is sent to the display control device 114 based on the fluctuation information stored in the fluctuation information storage means. Set the display command to suggest.

Then, when the display control device 114 receives a display command for suggesting stop variation information, for example, an effect display mode based on the actual lottery result of the special symbol that was forcibly stopped this time is displayed. Specifically, if the lottery result is a big win, a monster character is displayed, and if the lottery result is a small win, a symbol of a treasure box is displayed. Further, the color of the monster character is displayed in a variable manner depending on the type of jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize how many times the end of the game state with variable latency could be avoided by causing a small win.

In addition, in this embodiment, even at the timing of displaying the display mode ("V symbol") indicating a small winning, the actual lottery information (lottery result, remaining fluctuation time) of the special symbol that was forcibly stopped this time is indicated. However, the timing to display the suggestion is not limited to this, for example, at the timing when a small winning game starts, during a small winning game, or when a small winning game ends. It may also be configured to be performed at different timings. In addition, a fused display that combines a suggestion display and a display for indicating a small winning win may be performed, or game information for indicating the small winning game result (for example, the number of prize balls and the probability state) may be executed. The number of small winning games executed during the game) and the suggestion display may be combined.

Further, the above-mentioned suggestion display may be set so that it is easier to execute when the special symbol that was forcibly stopped this time has won a jackpot than when it has not won a jackpot. As a result, even if the special symbol that has been forcibly stopped this time has not won a jackpot, it is possible to make the player think that he has won a small jackpot at a good timing.

In the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, when a small hit is won, there are cases in which the changing special symbols are forcibly stopped and cases in which they are temporarily stopped. In this case, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the current small hit caused the special symbol variation being executed to be forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped. It is a good idea to set the display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, only the first ball entry opening 64b1 is arranged below the third symbol display device 81, and the right A first ball entrance 64b2 and a second ball entrance 640 are arranged, and on the downstream side there is a first variable winning device 65 that is opened during a jackpot game, and a small ball entrance on the right side of the first variable winning device 65. A second variable winning device 650 is arranged which becomes open during a winning game.

Further, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, a distribution channel is formed that can distribute and guide game balls to the right first ball entrance 64b2 and the second ball entrance 640. In the upper part of the distribution channel, there is a ball that is fired by right-handed hitting (a game method in which the player operates to fire the game ball with a firing strength that allows the game ball to flow down the right side of the third symbol display device 81). A rotary distribution member 700 is arranged which can alternately distribute the played game balls into a first flow path 701 and a second flow path 702.

The rotary distribution member 700 is formed with a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion that can receive game balls, and when the rotary distribution member 700 rotates, the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are formed. The upper and lower parts are arranged so as to face diagonally upward to the left. The rotation distributing member 700 is configured to rotate approximately 90 degrees in the left and right directions, and when the first receiving portion faces diagonally upward to the left (the state shown in FIG. 101), a right-handed game is When the ball enters the first receiving part, the rotary distribution member 700 rotates 90 degrees to the left due to the weight of the game ball, and distributes (guides) the game ball to the first channel 701. When the game balls are distributed to the first channel 7901 by the rotary distribution member 700, the rotation distribution member 700 is stopped with the second receiving portion facing diagonally upward to the left. Next, the game ball that was hit to the right enters the second receiving section, and the rotary distribution member 700 rotates to the right due to the weight of the entered game ball, which leads to the second flow path. The game balls in the second receiving section are distributed (guided) to 702.

In this way, the balls fired in the right-handed game are distributed alternately to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 by the rotary distribution member 700. The balls distributed to the first flow path 701 pass through the bending path 701a, pass through the through gate 67, and the second ball entry port 640, and flow out to the lower right side area. In addition, the balls distributed to the second flow path 702 flow down the third flow path 703a provided on the downstream side, flow into the inlet 704a, and enter the back side of the first flow path 701 (see FIG. 101). It flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the far side (from the viewpoint), and flows out to the lower right side area on the game board 13 from the outlet 704c.

The balls distributed to the two flow paths (first flow path 701, second flow path 702) by the rotary distribution member 700 merge below the right side area, and the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65 It flows down the top and flows into the out port 66.

The rotary distribution member 700 alternately distributes balls fired in a right-handed game into the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702, so when 100 balls are fired in one minute, the first flow Fifty pieces are distributed into the channel 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and 50 pieces are distributed into the second channel 702 at 1.2 second intervals. The first channel 701 is composed of a ball channel with a channel width for one ball (approximately 15 mm), and a curved channel 701a provided in the middle reduces the velocity of the ball flowing down. It is configured such that the ball passing time until the ball that has flowed into the first flow path 701 flows out from the first flow path 701 is about 2 seconds.

In the third embodiment, a through gate 67 is provided in the first flow path 701 and a second ball entry port 640 is provided in the second flow path 702. Thereby, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can be physically prevented from entering the second ball entry port 640.

In the game board 13, a constantly movable member 1500 is provided along the ball rolling surface at the most upstream part of the first channel 701, and when the constantly movable member 1500 is moved to the open position (open state), the ball is configured to be able to enter the right first ball entry port 64b.

Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be explained in detail. This constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. There is. Specifically, in a movable member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110, the operation is controlled based on a movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. In this movable scenario, the operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 seconds and then closing it for 1.2 seconds is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of the present modification 1, the balls fired in the right-handed game flow into the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and the rolling ball in which the constantly movable member 1500 is disposed It flows downstream while rolling on the surface. When the timing at which this ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls onto the always movable member) matches the timing at which the always movable valve 1500 becomes open, The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entry port 64b.

The timing of rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falling onto the constantly movable member) is at 1.2 second intervals, and the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 becomes open is 0 within 1.3 seconds. Since it is .1 second, the timing at which both of them match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when a right-handed game is played continuously, about four balls will enter the right first ball entrance 64b in one minute.

In other words, in a gaming state where a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, the ball will periodically enter the right first ball entrance 64b, so that the jackpot game will not be possible. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state in which the special drawing 1 is not held when the time saving state is entered after the end of the play. In addition, since the period during which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened at one time is set as a period (0.1 seconds) during which it is difficult for the player to aim, the first ball entered on the left in the normal gaming state. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game in which the player aims at the opening 64a.

To explain specifically, when playing a left-handed game in the normal gaming state, about 15 out of 250 balls fired will enter the first left ball entrance 64a. It is designed so that if a ball enters the ball, five prize balls will be paid out. Further, it is designed so that about 5 balls enter the general ball entrance 63, and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in a left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, it is possible to enter approximately 20 balls into the left first ball entrance 64a, taking into account that the prize balls that are paid out will be fired again. becomes.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state and a right-handed game is performed, the ball is designed so that about 9 of the 250 balls fired will enter the first right ball entrance 64b. If the ball hits the ball, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general ball entrance 63 is not provided in the right side area. Therefore, in a right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, approximately 10 balls must enter the right first ball entrance 64b, even considering that the prize balls that are paid out will be fired again. I can only do it. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from playing right-handed games.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the general ball entry port 63 is not provided in the game area (right side area) through which the ball fired in the right-handed game passes, when the game state is normal, the ball fired in the right-handed game is more likely to be hit right than in the left-handed game. The general ball entry hole 63 may be provided based on a design concept that does not give the player an advantage over the game. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls paid out as prize balls in a right-handed game during a time saving state or a jackpot state.

Next, among the configurations arranged on the right side area of the game board 13, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. do.

A through gate 67 is provided downstream of the first flow path 701 having a bent path 701a, and a second ball entry port 640 is provided downstream of the second flow path 702 (lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). are doing. With this configuration, the balls flowing into the second flow path 702 at 1.2 second intervals can be caused to flow down toward the second ball entry port 640 without reducing the speed of the balls flowing down. Therefore, since the interval between the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702 and a plurality of balls enter the second ball entry port 640 at the same time. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In addition, if you do not notice that the electric accessory 640a has been opened and the third symbol display device 81 informs you that the electric accessory 640a is open, the ball can be quickly transferred to the second ball entrance 640. You can let the ball enter the ball.

In addition, the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery, and the electric accessory 640a, whose operation is controlled by winning the normal symbol, are divided into different channels (first channel 701, Since the distribution member 700 is disposed in the second flow path 702), if the distribution member 700 is destroyed so that the balls flow down only to one of the flow paths (if the distribution function is disabled), the second ball entry port It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball at 640. In other words, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessories 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed and a state is created in which the balls flow down only in one flow path. This makes it possible to create a situation in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second ball entry port 640, but by using the configuration of this modification, it is possible to create a situation in which it is easy to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a situation where it is easy to cause this.

The case where the ball flows down the second flow path 702 will be explained. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the period during which the balls flow down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, the configuration is such that it takes about 1.5 seconds for the spheres that have flowed into the second flow path 702 to flow out from the outlet 704c. With this configuration, when 100 balls are fired toward the right side area in one minute, the balls that flow into the first flow path 701 and the balls that are fired next to the second flow path 701 The balls flowing into the ball flow down the lower right area of the game board 13 (the area where the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged) almost simultaneously (with a difference of about 0.1 seconds). Become. Therefore, in the game state (big win state or small win state) in which each variable winning device is released, it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at once.

Further, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701, so that the plurality of flow paths overlap when viewed from the front. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball channels using the depth direction of the game board 13, the space for forming the ball channels (the area occupied by the ball channels on the game board 13) can be reduced. can.

Further, the ball outlet (outlet 704c) of the second flow path 702 is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream side of the second ball entry port 640), and is located on the right side of the game board 13. The ball is configured to flow out downstream of the ball flowing out from the first flow path 701 in the lower region. As a result, the balls that flowed out from the outlet 704c with force (the balls that flowed out at a higher speed than the balls that flowed down the first flow path 701) directly collided with the balls that flowed out from the first flow path 701, resulting in irregular It is possible to suppress the situation in which ball flow occurs.

In this embodiment, a configuration is used in which the rotary distribution member 700 alternately distributes the balls fired in a right-handed game into two channels, but other configurations may be used, for example, two channels. The configuration may be such that the balls are distributed to one channel at a different ratio rather than alternately (1:1), or the ball may be distributed to three or more channels. Further, in this embodiment, the distribution member 700 is used which changes the distribution destination of the next passing ball depending on the weight of the passing ball. Separate members may also be used.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 110. Note that only the points that are different from the first embodiment will be illustrated and explained, and the illustration and explanation of the same configurations as the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The ROM 202 in the third embodiment is different from the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 10) in that a migration destination selection table 202ba is added, and the small winning random number table 202b is changed to the small winning random number 3 table 202bb. The second winning random number table 202c has been changed to the second winning random number 3 table 202bc, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f has been changed to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern 3 table 202bf, and the small winning type selection table 202g has been changed to small winning type selection 3 table 202bg. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment. The other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, so their explanation will be omitted.

Next, the small winning random number 3 table 202bb will be explained with reference to FIG. 103(a). In the third embodiment, as described above, when the gaming state is the probable gaming state, it is configured such that the small win is also won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, if the value of the first winning random number counter obtained is within the range of "112 to 342", it is configured to result in a small win.

Next, the second winning random number 3 table 202bc will be explained with reference to FIG. 103(b). The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it is configured so that even when the probability of a normal symbol is low (normal state, probability state), the winning of the normal symbol is almost possible. Specifically, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is "0 to 230", it is configured so that the normal symbol wins.

Next, the small winning type selection 3 table 202bg will be explained with reference to FIG. 104(a). In the third embodiment, as described above, when the gaming state is the probable gaming state, it is configured such that the small win is also won in the lottery of the first special symbol. If the value of the small win type counter is in the range of "0 to 49", "Small win A" is set as the small win type, and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", "Small win B" is set. be done.

If a small hit is won, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped or is forcibly stopped due to a miss, depending on the type of small win, in the same way as when a small hit is won with the second special symbol. It is configured like this. Specifically, if you win "Small win A", the second special symbol that is changing is temporarily stopped, and if it is "Small win B", you can stop the fluctuation of the second special symbol. It is configured to force a stop.

Next, the normal figure fluctuation pattern 3 table 202bf will be explained with reference to FIG. 104(b). The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the variation time is shortened even when the probability of a normal symbol is low. Specifically, the fluctuation time is configured to be 500 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) when the probability of a normal symbol is low. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier to fluctuate, and the chance of drawing a normal symbol increases. Furthermore, as described above, the third embodiment is configured so that it is easy to win the normal symbol even when the probability of the normal symbol is low. This makes it easier for the ball to enter the right first ball entry port 64b2 even in the potential state.

Next, the migration destination selection table 202ba will be explained with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. The transition destination selection table 202ba includes the type of fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting a fluctuation pattern determined after the small winning game when a small hit is won with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the number of times the transition is made. This is a lottery table for determining the number of times (the number of executions of the determination game (special symbol lottery) in which a variable pattern is selected from the transferred variable pattern selection table).

FIG. 105 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the migration destination selection table 202ba. The migration destination table 202ba includes a migration 1 table 202ba1 (see FIG. 107) and a migration 2 table 202ba2 (see FIG. 108), and the migration 1 table 202ba1 or the migration 2 table determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba. 202ba2 is configured to be set.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the contents of the migration destination selection table 202ba in detail. The gaming state is divided into a potential state (non-electronic support gaming state in a high probability gaming state) and a gaming state other than a potential gaming state (other), and the current gaming state When is in a gaming state other than the potential gaming state, the transition table is not set and the variable pattern is set from the currently set variable pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 15). ing.

On the other hand, in the case of the potential gaming state, the transition destination table and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (specified number after transition) for selecting a fluctuation pattern from the transition destination table are determined based on the value of the acquired transition counter 203ba. are set respectively. Specifically, when the value of the acquired migration counter 203ba is "0 to 90", the migration 1 table 202ba1 is set (selected) and 10 times is set (selected) as the specified number of times after migration. . Further, when the value of the acquired migration counter 203ba is "91 to 98", the migration 1 table ba1 is set, and 3 times is set as the specified number of times after migration. Further, when the value of the acquired migration counter 203ba is "99", the migration 2 table 202ba2 is set, and 100 times is set as the specified number of times after migration.

In this way, only in the potential game state, if a small hit is won, the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set as the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e to be used after the small win game. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to play a right-handed game instead of a left-handed game (a game method in which a player plays a game by firing a game ball with a firing intensity that causes the game ball to flow down the left channel of the third symbol display device 81). Only in a potential game state which is a game state in which a game is played, a specific fluctuation pattern selection table can be used to determine a fluctuation pattern for a specified number of times when it comes to a small winning game.

Here, in the normal game state (game state without low probability electric support) and the variable probability game state (game state with high probability electric support), 10 minutes is selected as the variable time of the second special symbol. In addition, since the winning rate of the ball into the right first entrance 64b2 is lower than that when hitting the ball with the left, it is easier for the player to play the game by hitting with the left and hitting the left ball into the first left entrance 64b1. The game is configured so that playing the game by letting the ball enter is a more advantageous game method for the player. In addition, in this embodiment, although not shown, the setting of the judgment value of the second winning random number table 202c has been changed, and the judgment value of the normal symbol per random number table for low probability is set to "0 to 230". is set, and "0 to 231" is set as a random number table per normal symbol for high probability times, and the difference between low probability times and high probability times is reduced. Moreover, the setting value of the general pattern fluctuation pattern table 202f has also been changed, and both the general pattern low accuracy and the general pattern high accuracy are set to 500 ms. By configuring in this way, the electric The accessory is set to be easily opened, and the game ball is configured to enter the second ball entry port 640 more easily than the left first ball entry port 64b1.

However, since the variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be significantly longer between the normal game state and the variable probability game state, it is possible to configure the game ball hit right to be disadvantageous to the player. , it is possible to make the player play the game using a left-handed game. In addition, in the potential game state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set short, so it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to play the game by hitting right (see FIG. 17(b)). ). On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 minutes as shown in FIG. 17(b), and the lottery of the first special symbol is suppressed.

In the third embodiment, when the game enters the potential game state, right-handed games are possible (possible when the variable time is set short), and the second special symbol is drawn, making it easier to win a small hit. In the small winning game, the 2R second variable winning device 650 is opened, so it becomes possible to enter the game balls into the second variable winning device 650, and the prize balls for the winnings are paid out to the player. This allows the player to increase the number of balls he has. Therefore, the longer the period of the potential gaming state is set, the more chances of winning a small win (number of wins) can be increased.

Here, if the jackpot A in the first special symbol is won, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a variable probability gaming state (high probability, gaming state with electric support), so it becomes a left-handed playing state. A gaming state (a gaming state in which it is difficult to execute a small winning game) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probable gaming state is set.

However, in the third embodiment, in the case of a small win B, the lottery result for the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is changing is forcibly set as a loss based on the stoppage of the special symbol indicating a small win. Configured to stop. Therefore, if a variable display of the first special symbol (corresponding to) based on the lottery result of jackpot A is executed, the small display of the second special symbol will be displayed before the variation time (variation period) elapses. By stopping the fluctuation of the lottery result that results in a winning B, it is possible to forcibly stop and display the fluctuation of the lottery result that results in a jackpot A in the first special symbol that is fluctuating. It is possible to prevent the game from shifting to the variable probability gaming state, and it is possible to lengthen the period of the potential gaming state.

Therefore, in the potential game state, the fluctuation time when the second special symbol results in a small win (may be only small win B) is shorter than the fluctuation time when the first special symbol results in a jackpot (may only be jackpot A). By making it easier to select, it is possible to create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Therefore, although the details will be described later, once the transition 2 table 202ba2 (see FIG. 108) is determined, the fluctuation time for the first special symbol to become a jackpot will be a fluctuation of 60 seconds with a probability of 99% selection rate. The time is determined, and the variation time in which the result of the judgment on the second special symbol is a small hit is determined to be a variation time of 1 s with a probability of 95% selection rate. Further, in the case of the second special symbol, if the result of the judgment is negative, a variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%. Therefore, after the start of the fluctuation that results in a jackpot with the first special symbol, 120 miss fluctuations are possible, and the probability of a small win with the second special symbol is set at 231/459 (see Figure 103(a)). Therefore, there is a high probability of winning small win B (the probability of selecting small win B is 1/2 of winning the small win), and the second special symbol is stopped, and jackpot A is won. The fluctuation of the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped as a miss. In addition, since the specified number of times for the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set to 100 as shown in FIG. (The condition is that the potential gaming state is set.) When moving from the potential gaming state to another gaming state, the variable pattern selection table (No. (Same as in one embodiment) is set)). In addition, even if you win a small win during the period when the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set (within the specified number of times), the destination table will not be changed, and the same table will be played until the specified number of times has passed. Destination tables are maintained and configured.

In this way, by setting the transition 2 table 202ba2, the setting period of the potential game state becomes longer, and during that time, it is possible to win a small win, and the number of small wins that are won is increased and is given to the player. The number of prize balls can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that it is possible to make a small hit with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the invention is not limited to this, and like in the first embodiment, a small win can be made with only the second special symbol. It may be configured so that it hits. In addition, only the small win B was configured to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol when the lottery result is a loss, but it is not limited to this, and in all small wins, the fluctuation of the first special symbol In the case of a small hit, the second special symbol) may be forcibly stopped due to a miss.

Next, referring to FIG. 107, the migration 1 table 202ba1 will be explained. FIG. 107 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the migration 1 table 202ba1. The migration 1 table 202ba1 stores migration information by determining the migration 1 table 202ba1 as the migration destination table when a small win is won using the migration destination selection table 202ba (see FIG. 106) (at the end timing of the small win game). This is a table set in area 203bc.

In the transition 1 table 202ba1, if the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a jackpot, a variation time of 0.5s is determined with a selection probability of 95%, and a variation time of 60s with a selection probability of 5%. The variation time of is configured to be determined. Further, when the lottery result is a small win, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%. Further, if the lottery result is a loss, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is a jackpot, a fluctuation time of 0.5s is determined with a selection probability of 95%, and a fluctuation time of 600s is determined with a selection probability of 5%. is configured to be In addition, if the lottery result is a small win, the configuration is such that the variation time of 1s is determined with a selection probability of 90%, and the variation time of 0.5s is determined with a selection probability of 10%. It is configured. If the lottery result is a loss, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

In this way, in the transition 1 table 202ba1, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, a short fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is determined with a high selection probability, and when the second special symbol becomes a small win, Since the variation time of 1 s or 0.5 s is selected, the structure is such that it is difficult for the first special symbol to start varying and forcibly stop after the first special symbol starts varying. Therefore, in the transition 1 table 202ba1, when jackpot A is won with the first special symbol, it is difficult to forcibly stop the fluctuation, so the transition destination table (which is disadvantageous to the player) It is configured as a variation pattern selection table). Therefore, according to the transfer destination selection table 202ba, the predetermined number of times after transfer in the transfer 1 table 202ba1 is set to be disadvantageous to the player (10 times in this embodiment). In addition, the probability of being selected for the transition 1 table 202ba1 is set to 99/100 in the transition destination selection table 202ba, and in the potential gaming state, the potential gaming state is set for a long time, making the gambling nature too high. It is designed to prevent defects.

Next, referring to FIG. 108, migration 2 table 202ba2 will be explained. FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this migration 2 table 202ba2. The migration 2 table 202ba2 is set in the migration information storage area 203bc when the migration 2 table 202ba2 is determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba.

In the transition 2 table 202ba2, if the judgment result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, a fluctuation time of 0.5s is determined with a selection probability of 1%, and a fluctuation time of 60s is determined with a selection probability of 99%. is configured to be Furthermore, when the result of the judgment is a small win, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%. Further, if the result of the judgment is incorrect, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the structure is configured such that a variation time of 0.5s is determined with a selection probability of 1%, and a variation time of 600s with a selection probability of 99%. configured to be determined. Further, when the result of the judgment is a small hit, the variation time is determined to be 1 s with a selection probability of 95%, and the variation time of 30 s is determined with a selection probability of 5%. Further, if the result of the judgment is incorrect, the variation time of 0.5 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

In this way, in the transition 2 table 202ba2, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, a long fluctuation time (60s) with a high probability is determined as the fluctuation time selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, and the lottery result of the second special symbol The variation time selected when is a small hit is configured such that a short variation time (1 s) is selected with high probability. Therefore, even if the fluctuation of the small hit B starts in the second special symbol after the fluctuation that becomes a jackpot has started in the first special symbol, the fluctuation in the first special symbol will start before the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops. The fluctuation of the second special symbol becomes easier to stop, and the first special symbol that is fluctuating can be forced to stop as a result of the determination that it is a failure. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the execution of the jackpot A, lengthen the period in which the latent probability change is maintained, increase the number of executions of the small winning game, and increase the number of prize balls for the player.

In addition, in the transition 2 table 202ba2, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, the fluctuation time is set as short as 0.5s, so the fluctuation time for the first special symbol to become a jackpot (60s) Even after being executed, the first special symbol can be made to fluctuate 120 times until it stops, and the lottery probability of a small win is 231/459, so there is a high probability that the first special symbol will stop fluctuating multiple times. Until then, you can win a small prize. Since the selection ratio of small win B among the small wins is 1/2, the fluctuation that becomes small win B can be easily stopped before the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops, and the execution of jackpot A can be prevented. It is configured to be easy to use.

Next, the special table will be explained with reference to FIG. 109. The special table is a variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern during the potential game state in the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table ba2 is set and a specified number of times has passed. This is a type of selection table.

FIG. 109 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special table. This special table is stored in the transition information storage area 203bc at the timing when the next fluctuation pattern is selected after the specified number of changes has passed after the transition 1 table 202ba1 or the transition 2 table 202ba2 is set. Set.

The special table is such that if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, a fluctuation time of 0.5s is determined with a selection probability of 20%, and a fluctuation time of 60s is determined with a selection probability of 80%. It is composed of Furthermore, when the result of the judgment is a small win, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%. Further, if the result of the judgment is incorrect, the variation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol is a jackpot, a 0.5s variation time is determined with a 20% selection probability, and a 600s variation time is determined with an 80% selection probability. It is configured. In addition, when the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a small hit, the structure is configured such that a fluctuation time of 1 s is determined with a selection probability of 50%, and a fluctuation time of 30 s is determined with a selection probability of 50%. has been done. Furthermore, if the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is incorrect, the variation time of 0.5 seconds is determined with a selection probability of 100%.

In this way, in the special table, the selection probability is set higher than in the transition 1 table 202ba1, in which the variation time of 60s (seconds) is determined when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot. The selection ratio in which the fluctuation time of 1 s is determined as the fluctuation time of the small hit in the special symbol is set low. Further, the fluctuation time when the second special symbol comes off is set to 0.5 s, which is set shorter than that of the transition 1 table 202ba1. In other words, the special table is configured so that it is easier to forcibly stop the 60 seconds fluctuation resulting in a jackpot A in the first special symbol due to a miss by stopping the fluctuation resulting in a small win B in the second special symbol than in the transition 1 table 202ba2. It is made up of tables that are advantageous to the player, and setting a special table corresponds to setting a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the special table, a long fluctuation time of 30 seconds is determined with a selection probability of 1/2 for the small hit fluctuation time, and a fluctuation (fluctuation time 60 seconds) that becomes jackpot A in the first special symbol is started. The configuration is such that at most one small winning variation can be executed. Thereby, the special table is configured so that it does not become a table more advantageous than the migration 2 table 202ba2.

In this way, when the transition 1 table 202ba1 is set and the specified number of times has elapsed, a special table is set that provides an advantageous gaming state until the next small win and the transition destination table is determined by lottery. It is composed of Thereby, it is configured to prevent the jackpot A from being executed and the potential game state ending after the predetermined number of times has elapsed and before moving to the next destination table. Furthermore, even after the transition 2 table 202ba2 that provides the most advantageous gaming state to the player is set and the specified number of times has elapsed, a special table that is more advantageous to the player than the transition 1 table 202ba1 is set. , it is possible to maintain a state in which the player's desire to play is heightened, and it is possible to make the player interested in the type of transfer destination table that will be set next.

Normally, in a gaming machine, the player's interest is highest in the prize ball that can be obtained in a jackpot game, but according to the present embodiment, in the normal game state or the variable probability game state, the player is interested in the jackpot game. It is possible to make the player play the game with the expectation that the jackpot game with the first special symbol will not be executed in the potential game state, and it is possible to have different expectations depending on the game state, making the game more diverse. It can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. The RAM 203 in the third embodiment is different from the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19) in that a migration counter 203ba, a post-migration variation counter 203bb, and a migration information storage area 203bc are added. The other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, so their explanation will be omitted.

The migration counter 203ba is a counter for determining the migration destination table and the predetermined number of times after migration (prescribed number of times) from the migration destination selection table 202ba. The transition counter 203ba is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 99", and is a counter value that is updated in the process of S2411 in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. be. When the power is turned on, the value that was backed up when the power was turned off is updated, and when the RAM is cleared and the backup area is initialized, the update is started from the initial value "0". This transition counter 203ba is configured to be acquired based on the fact that a small hit has been won in the process of S1172 in the special drawing 2 missing variation process 3 (see S1071 in FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. ing. Regarding the special figure 1 off variation processing 3, the processing of the second special symbol in the process of the special figure 2 off variation processing 3 (see S1071 in FIG. 112) is changed to the first special symbol, and the processing of the first special symbol is changed to the first special symbol. Since they are only replaced with the two special symbols, illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

The post-transition variation counter 203bb is a counter for counting the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the migration destination table is set (the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). . The post-transition variation counter 203bb is set to an initial value when the migration destination table is set in the process of S1175 in the special figure 2 off variation process 3 (see S1071 in FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. A certain "0" is set. In addition, after being incremented by 1 in the processing of S1176 and S1199 in the special figure 2 out-of-range fluctuation processing 3 (see S1071 in FIG. 112), the value of the processing of S1177 is the specified number of times determined by the migration destination selection table 202ba. If it is determined that there is a specified number of times, a process of setting a special table in the migration information storage area 203bc is performed.

In addition, in the special figure 1 off variation process 3 (not shown), similarly to the special figure 2 off variation process 3, the process for the post-shift variation number counter 203bb is executed.

The migration information storage area 203bc is a storage area in which a migration destination table determined from the migration destination selection table 202ba and a special table that is set when the predetermined number of times the migration destination table has been set have passed. When the information of the destination table is stored in this area, the variation pattern is controlled to be determined from the destination table of the stored type as the special symbol variation pattern selection table.

<About the control process of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 and 112. In this embodiment, in contrast to the control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the first embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S306 in FIG. 31) is the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 3 (not shown). Then, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 37: S908) is changed to the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972), and the special symbol 2 off variation process (FIG. 38: S1009) is changed to special symbol 2 off variation. The difference is that the process is changed to process 3 (FIG. 112: S1071). In addition, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3, the process for the first special symbol in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) is the second special symbol, and the process for the second special symbol is the first special symbol. Since the only difference is that the pattern is changed, detailed illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 111, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972), first, data of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S1001). It is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on (S1002). It is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on, that is, whether it is in the probability variable gaming state or the latent probability variable gaming state. When it is determined that the probability change flag 203 is on, the lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table 202a for high probability (S1003). After that, the process of S1005 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1002, if it is determined that the probability variable flag 203g is off (S1002: No), a lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table 202a for low probability (S1004). In the process of S1005, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the processes of S1003 and S1004 is a jackpot (S1005). If it is determined that it is a jackpot (S1005: Yes), the jackpot flag 203n corresponding to the special drawing 2 is set to ON (S1006). The lottery result for the second special symbol is set as a jackpot (S1007).

Based on the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2, a jackpot symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1008). The value of the post-transition variation counter 203bb is reset to "0" (S1071). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1005, when it is determined that the lottery result is a loser (S1005: No), special drawing 2 loser fluctuation processing is executed (S1009). After executing the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1009), this process is ended. In addition, the details of the special symbol 2 loss variation process (S1009) will be explained with reference to FIG. executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the special symbol 2 off variation process 3 (FIG. 112: S1071) which is one process in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (FIG. 111: S972) in the third embodiment The process will be explained. In the special figure 2 losing variation process 3 (FIG. 112: S1071), first, it is determined whether the lottery result is a small win (S1101). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S1101: Yes), the small win flag 203p is set to ON (S1102). The lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a small win (S1103). For the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37, a symbol corresponding to the small winning symbol is set (S1104). It is determined whether a migration destination table (migration 1 table or migration 2 table) or a special table is set (S1171). If it is determined that a migration destination table or a special table has been set (S1171: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the post-migration variation counter 203bb (S1199), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1171, if it is determined that either the migration destination table (migration 1 table or migration 2 table) or the special table is not set (S1171: No), the value of the migration counter 203ba is acquired. (S1172). Next, a migration destination table is set based on the acquired value of the migration counter 203ba (S1173). Then, a command indicating the set migration destination table is set (S1174), the value of the post-migration variation counter 203bb is set to 0 (S1175), and this process ends.

Further, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S1101: No), the value of the post-transition variation counter 203bb is incremented by 1 (S1176). Then, in the process of S1176, it is determined whether the added value of the post-transition variation counter 203bb is a specified number (S1177). If the value of the post-transition variation counter 203bb is the specified number (S1177: Yes), a special table is set (S1178), a transition command is set (S1179), and the number displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. 2. A missing symbol of the special symbol is set (S1105), and this process is ended.

In the process of S1177, if it is determined that the value of the post-transition variation counter 203bb is not the specified number (S1177: No), the process of S1178 to S1179 described above is skipped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The missing symbol of the second special symbol is set (S1105), and this process is ended.

<Modified example of third embodiment>
Next, a modification of the third embodiment described above will be explained. The high probability gaming state in the latent probability variation and probability variation gaming state is shifted to the low probability state when the number of variations of the special symbol (the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). It may be configured to do so. With this configuration, even if a destination table continues to be determined that forces the execution of jackpot A to be forcibly stopped due to a loss, the gaming state can be varied, and the gambling experience is significantly increased. Problems can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as a second modification of the third embodiment, in the latent probability variable gaming state, the selected transfer destination table is set to be variable depending on the number of changes of the special symbol, for example, 200 times or more (the If the total value of the number of fluctuations of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol fluctuates, the jackpot fluctuation of the 1st special symbol is lengthened (for example, 300 seconds), and the small hit fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol is shortened (for example, , 0.5s). By shortening the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the second special symbol to 0.5 seconds, it may be configured to set a transfer destination table that is more advantageous for the player. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's desire to forcibly stop the jackpot A by a small hit of the second special symbol in the latent probability change, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Above, in the first to third embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 that can simultaneously execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol has been described. Each configuration is applied to other pachinko machines 10, that is, the first special symbol lottery (variation) and the second special symbol lottery (variation) are not executed at the same time, and each lottery is triggered by a prize winning. Priority is given to the type of pachinko machine 10 that performs a lottery in the order in which the information is acquired (the order of the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640), or the lottery of one special symbol. It may also be configured to be used in a pachinko machine 10 of a type that performs games on a regular basis.

Furthermore, in each of the embodiments described above, the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol are executed at the same time, and if a specific jackpot is won with either symbol, when the fluctuation stops, the fluctuation of the other symbol Although it is configured to discard (forcibly stop in case of a miss) or interrupt the fluctuation of the jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be executed when the jackpot fluctuation starts. Furthermore, even if a small hit is won due to the fluctuation of the other special symbol, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is discarded or interrupted depending on the type of the small win, but the fluctuation of the other special symbol does not start. It can be set at any time.

In each of the embodiments described above, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 was used as an example of various effects to be performed. Any display effect displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, an audio effect that notifies the player by voice, or various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10 may be used to alert the player. It is also possible to use a light emitting effect to notify the user.

Furthermore, as the various effects executed in each of the above-described embodiments, an information effect that makes sure the player understands the content, and a suggestion effect that allows the player to subtly inform the player of the content are used. Suggestive effects may be executed instead of the above, or notification effects may be executed instead of suggestive effects.

Furthermore, in each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two types of high and low probabilities of winning a jackpot (jackpot probability) in a special symbol lottery (a high probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of special symbols). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) that can set one setting value from among a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is set. The main control device 110 may be configured to execute control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, six levels of setting values from 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the jackpot probability is the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. It is preferable to configure the jackpot probability to be set for each setting value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest when the jackpot probability is the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each setting value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to vary according to the setting value, or the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be changed depending on the setting value. It may be configured such that only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state is varied according to the set value.

In addition, depending on the above-mentioned setting values, not only the jackpot probability but also the selection ratio of each jackpot type, the probability of winning a small win, the selection ratio of special symbol fluctuation patterns, etc. The fluctuation time may be made different. In this case, for example, a variation pattern or jackpot type that is likely to be selected only when a specific setting value is set is provided, and whether or not a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed. The currently set setting value may be determined by the player's attention to the setting value.

Further, the configuration is configured to set a setting command to indicate the set setting value, and execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value based on the setting command received on the audio lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the type of jackpot (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the variation time) output from the main controller 110 may be used. When the command is received, the currently set setting value may be determined from the contents of the received command, and a setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the determination result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, as in each of the embodiments described above, the above-mentioned setting values can be set in the pachinko machine 10 that can simultaneously execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. When using a configuration, various parameters may be defined for each setting value so that the ease of variation (lottery) of each special symbol can be varied according to the set value, or a specific With the setting value, there is a specific game state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player, but in the case of a predetermined setting value that is different from the specific setting value, the lottery of the other special symbol that is different from one special symbol is Various parameters may be defined for each set value so as to be advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player means that the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed, or that the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (a bonus given when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (jackpot game content) This concept includes that the contents of the small winning game, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game) are advantageous to the player.

Note that the gaming state transition destination and transition distribution rate after a jackpot in each gaming state are not limited to these and may be set as appropriate. For example, only the time saving state 2 may be set as the time saving state to which the game mode transitions from the normal gaming state. This has the effect that it is possible to suppress a decline in the desire of a player to play, who was unable to shift to the variable probability state despite winning a jackpot in the normal gaming state.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, the destination of the gaming state and the distribution rate are unified according to the type of special symbol, but the destination of the gaming state and the distribution rate are not limited to this. may be changed. This makes it possible to provide more complex gameplay, and has the effect of suppressing early boredom with the game.

In each of the embodiments described above, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved balls counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the number of reserved balls command is issued. Although a case has been described in which data is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, the transmission is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. This makes it possible to reduce the number of times the main controller 110 sends the number of pending commands to the audio lamp controller 113 and the number of times the audio lamp controller 113 receives the number of pending commands, so the main controller 110 and The control burden on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, entering the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls held is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls, which is displayed in a variable manner based on winnings to the first ball entrance 64, can be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four can be displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured as follows.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display may be performed by moving the symbols vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the display of fluctuating symbols; for example, one or more characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes with or without the symbol. This also includes the presentation and display that will be displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the embodiments described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is highlighted and displayed to the player and displaying the secondary symbol. Moreover, as the structure of the display means, a structure other than a liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, frame buttons 22 and 23 are used as operating means that can be operated by the player, and the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used to determine that the operating means has been operated when the player presses the button. A lever-shaped operating means that can be used to determine whether the player has operated the lever by tilting it left or right or forward or backward, or a lever-shaped operating means that can be used to determine whether the player has operated it by touching or coming close to it. It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means that can be identified, a wireless type operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c It may be configured such that part or all of the operation control is executed not by the main control device 110 but by the audio lamp control device 113 side.

In each of the embodiments described above, the audio lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the performance executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is controlled by the audio lamp. Although configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The same control device may execute the processing for With this configuration, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as the plurality of special symbol types, but the number of types of special symbols is not limited to this, and three or more types of special symbols are used. The special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game feature in which a plurality of special symbols are drawn (varied) according to predetermined rules, and a game feature in which a lottery (variation) is carried out independently of each other are explained. However, the game features described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, a pachinko machine may be implemented in which a plurality of levels of probability combinations (commonly referred to as settings) are provided for the jackpot lottery, and the settings can be changed at the game parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In addition, for pachinko machines that have multiple settings, the combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of jackpot probability in a low probability state and jackpot probability in a variable probability state) can be set in one of multiple stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to , but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the pachinko machine is capable of varying the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot depending on the settings. It's okay. That is, the rate at which jackpots of a type advantageous to the player are determined may be varied, or the rate at which jackpots of a type disadvantageous to the player are determined, may be varied depending on the settings. More specifically, for example, the rate at which jackpots are determined with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) may be varied depending on the settings, or the rate at which jackpots are determined with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may also be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting is varied by varying the proportion of each setting. In addition, for example, after the jackpot ends, the ratio at which a jackpot is determined that will give a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) can be varied depending on the setting, or a jackpot that will give a small number of time savings (for example, 0 times). The rate at which the is determined may be varied depending on the settings. Furthermore, the rate at which jackpots are determined to transition (or are likely to transition) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot can be varied according to settings, or may be changed to a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, normal state). ) may be changed depending on the setting. Further, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided which has a significantly higher probability of being determined only in a specific setting (almost never being determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the settings can be set in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set to 6. In setting 6, if there is a jackpot, a 6-round jackpot is determined 2% of the time, while in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only 0.01% of the time. It may also be a configuration. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, there is an extremely high possibility that the most advantageous setting is 6, so the player is forced to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot when playing the game. be able to. In addition, instead of this, or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the proportion of the jackpot type in which 66 time saving times are given after the jackpot ends is higher than in other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or the accessory inside the jackpot) operates in a different operation pattern from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is more likely to be determined (the ratio of determination becomes higher) with a specific setting. In addition, when changing the combination of jackpot probabilities depending on the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in the variable probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in the variable probability state, the setting is less favorable to the player. A configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot probability increases as the number increases. This configuration is particularly suitable for a type of game ball type in which the number of special symbol drawings increases as the number of drawings for special symbols increases (the number of prize balls paid out is easier to increase than the number of game balls fired). Effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying this to a type of gaming machine where the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won, and where there is a high probability of a small win in the variable probability state, the advantage of high settings can be achieved. You can improve your sexuality. That is, when the probability of a jackpot is low in a variable probability state, the number of drawings until the next jackpot is likely to be increased, so there are more chances to win a small jackpot and win a prize ball. Therefore, when the probability changes, it becomes easier for the player to obtain more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

The embodiments described above may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristics Group A>
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information on a display means to indicate a first determination result by the first determination means. , first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information to be displayed by the first dynamic display means; a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for displaying the first identification information; and a second determining means capable of executing a second determination. , a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; and a second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means. a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; and a display mode for displaying the second determination result on the display means, the second identification information is a second benefit granting means capable of granting a second benefit that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the first identification information being dynamically displayed by the first dynamic displaying means; a first control for forcibly setting the first determination result corresponding to the first identification information dynamically displayed to be other than the specific first determination result, based on a condition established during the period during which the first determination result is dynamically displayed; and a second control for interrupting the dynamic display of the dynamically displayed first identification information.

BACKGROUND ART Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines enter a winning state when the result of a lottery, which is conducted based on a game ball entering a starting prize opening, is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the winning state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, by changing the type of starting winning slot that the player mainly uses to win a prize in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game can be varied depending on the change in the gaming state, and a variety of games can be played. An attempt has been made to increase interest by providing players with the following information (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-000392). The lottery game that is executed when a game ball enters the starting winning slot is only displayed in a predetermined fluctuating pattern, making the game monotonous and causing players to quickly get bored with the game. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine A1, the first control forcibly causes the result to be other than a specific first determination result depending on the condition under which the first identification information being dynamically displayed is satisfied, and the second control causes the dynamic display to be interrupted. Since the first identification information is executed by the switching means, the contents dynamically displayed by the first identification information can be made different from those at the start of the dynamic display depending on the conditions that are satisfied, thereby providing a variety of effects to the player. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of players getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine A1, the switching means sets the condition that the first type of benefit in the second benefit is granted during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The first condition is that the first control is executable, and the second type of benefit in the second benefit is granted during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the second control can be executed when a second condition in the conditions is that the second control is performed.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, it is possible to switch the control in the dynamic display of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed depending on the privilege provided. This has the effect of making it easier to recognize the benefits.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the switching means dynamically displays the first identification information based on the fact that the specific first determination result is determined as at least one of the conditions for the first condition to be met. A gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first condition is satisfied that the first identification information based on the determination as a specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. Since the first benefit is set to at least one of the following, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the granting of the first benefit and limit the privileges to be granted.

Gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines A1 to A3, the first benefit is comprised of a benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the second benefit.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first privilege is set to be more advantageous than the second privilege, so the provision of the first privilege is forcibly stopped. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of increased gambling quality in a short period of time and making it easier to receive the second benefit.

Any of the gaming machines A1 to A4 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state setting means A game characterized in that the means is capable of setting the first gaming state based on the fact that the first benefit is granted in a state where the second gaming state is set. Machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the granting of the first benefit is regulated by executing the first control, so the first benefit is not granted and the first gaming state is changed. This has the effect of suppressing a problem in which the player's interest is significantly reduced due to the transition from the second gaming state to the second gaming state.

A gaming machine A6, which is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5 has a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect for making it easier for the first condition to be satisfied when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a suggestion effect that makes it easier for the first condition to be satisfied is executed, so that the satisfaction of the first condition is made possible by the execution of the suggestion effect. This has the effect of increasing players' expectations and increasing the interest of the game.

<Characteristic group B> (variable difficulty of discarding jackpot fluctuations due to small hits)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information on a display means to indicate a first determination result by the first determination means. , first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information to be displayed by the first dynamic display means; a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for displaying the first identification information; and a second determining means capable of executing a second determination. , a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; and a second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means. a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; and a display mode for displaying the second determination result on the display means, the second identification information is a second benefit granting means capable of granting a second benefit that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the first identification information being dynamically displayed by the first dynamic displaying means; a period in which the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forced to be other than the specific first determination result based on the establishment of the first condition; A gaming machine B1 characterized in that it has a first control means capable of executing one control, and a frequency variable means capable of varying the frequency with which the first condition is satisfied.

BACKGROUND ART Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines enter a winning state when the result of a lottery, which is conducted based on a game ball entering a starting prize opening, is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the winning state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, by changing the type of starting winning slot that the player mainly uses to win a prize in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game can be varied depending on the change in the gaming state, and a variety of games can be played. An attempt has been made to increase interest by providing players with the following information (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-000392). The lottery game that is executed when a game ball enters the starting winning slot is only displayed in a predetermined fluctuating pattern, making the game monotonous and causing players to quickly get bored with the game. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine B1, since the frequency at which the first control is executed can be varied by the frequency variable means, the frequency at which the first benefit is given can be varied, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of users getting bored early.

In gaming machine B1, the first condition can be established based on the second benefit being granted when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. The frequency variable means is configured to vary the establishment frequency by varying the second dynamic display period determined by the second dynamic display period determining means. Game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the establishment frequency can be easily varied by varying the second dynamic display period corresponding to the specific second determination result determined. This has the effect of being able to vary the frequency with precise control.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the second dynamic display period determined by the second dynamic display period determining means includes a short dynamic display period group in which short dynamic display periods are easily selected, and a long dynamic display period group. At least a long dynamic display period group is set, in which the dynamic display period is set to be easy to select, and the frequency variable means selects one of the short dynamic display period group and the long dynamic display period group. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that the frequency of establishment is varied by setting one of the two.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the frequency of establishment can be varied by switching the dynamic display period groups, so by setting various dynamic display period groups, This has the effect of being able to switch the establishment frequency in a variety of ways.

<Characteristics Group C> (Variable advantageous period for small winnings)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information on a display means to indicate a first determination result by the first determination means. , first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information to be displayed by the first dynamic display means; a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for displaying the first identification information; and a second determining means capable of executing a second determination. , a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; and a second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means. a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; and a display mode for displaying the second determination result on the display means, the second identification information is a second benefit granting means capable of granting a second benefit that is advantageous to the player when displayed; a first gaming state; and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state; In the gaming machine, the gaming state setting means is configured to set the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result during a period in which the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine can be set by switching from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, and the gaming machine is disadvantageous to the player from the second gaming state when the first benefit is granted. The game state is set, and during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the first identification information dynamically displayed is determined based on the establishment of the first condition. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that it has a first control means capable of executing a first control to force the first determination result corresponding to one identification information to be other than the specific first determination result.

BACKGROUND ART Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines enter a winning state when the result of a lottery, which is conducted based on a game ball entering a starting prize opening, is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the winning state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, by changing the type of starting winning slot that the player mainly uses to win a prize in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game can be varied depending on the change in the gaming state, and a variety of games can be played. An attempt has been made to increase interest by providing players with the following information (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-000392). The lottery game that is executed when a game ball enters the starting winning slot is only displayed in a predetermined fluctuating pattern, making the game monotonous and causing players to quickly get bored with the game. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine C1, by executing the first control, it is possible to avoid switching to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, so play the game with the expectation that the first condition will be satisfied. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of players getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine C1, the first condition is satisfied on the condition that the second benefit is granted when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine C2 is characterized in that it is configured to enable.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the second privilege is provided, so that it is possible to avoid setting a disadvantageous gaming state to the player due to the provision of the first privilege. Therefore, the player can play the game in anticipation of receiving the second benefit, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second determination means is capable of determining a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, and based on the determination that the special second determination result is the special second determination result. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that a special benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit is provided to the player.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, a special privilege that is more advantageous than the first privilege is granted to the player based on the second determination, so that the provision of the first privilege is regulated. Even so, it has the effect of suppressing problems that reduce the player's desire to play.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the first condition can be satisfied even when the special benefit is provided.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, even when a special privilege is awarded, the first privilege is restricted from being awarded, which is disadvantageous to the player. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by giving special benefits to the player while regulating the setting of the game state.

When the special benefit is granted in any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the dynamic display of the dynamically displayed first identification information is suspended until a cancellation condition is met. Gaming machine C5 is characterized by certain things.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C1 to C3, when a special benefit is awarded, the dynamic display of the first identification information is interrupted, so that the special benefit is not granted. This has the effect of making the results of the first determination more interesting even after the first determination has been made.

<Feature D group> (Aiming for an advantageous jackpot during jackpot fluctuations (replay removal on ST machine))
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information on a display means to indicate a first determination result by the first determination means. , first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information to be displayed by the first dynamic display means; a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for displaying the first identification information; and a second determining means capable of executing a second determination. , a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; and a second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means. a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; and a display mode for displaying the second determination result on the display means, the second identification information is a second benefit granting means capable of granting a second benefit that is advantageous to the player when displayed; a first gaming state; and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state; In a gaming machine having a gaming state setting means capable of setting, the gaming state setting means is based on the fact that when the second gaming state is set, the first benefit is granted. , setting the first game state, and switching from the second game state to the first game state based on the number of times of determination by the first determining means or the second determining means being the number of ends; A game machine D1 characterized in that it is a game machine.

BACKGROUND ART Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines enter a winning state when the result of a lottery, which is conducted based on a game ball entering a starting prize opening, is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the winning state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, by changing the type of starting winning slot that the player mainly uses to win a prize in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game can be varied depending on the change in the gaming state, and a variety of games can be played. An attempt has been made to increase interest by providing players with the following information (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-000392). The lottery game that is executed when a game ball enters the starting winning slot is only displayed in a predetermined fluctuating pattern, making the game monotonous and causing players to quickly get bored with the game. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine D1, there are cases in which the first gaming state is switched when the number of determinations reaches the number of ends, and there are cases in which the first gaming state is set after the first benefit is granted. It is possible to play a variety of games, and this has the effect of suppressing the problem of early boredom with the games.

In the gaming machine D1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state based on dynamic display of the first identification information based on the specific first determination result. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that it is possible to set the first gaming state after the dynamic display of the first identification information is completed.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the period of the second gaming state is determined by the dynamic display period of the first identification information based on a specific first determination result. This has the effect of making the player interested in the dynamic display period and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the dynamically displayed first identification information is displayed based on the establishment of the first condition. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it has a first control means capable of executing a first control to force the first determination result corresponding to information to be other than the specific first determination result.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the first condition is met, it is possible to forcibly set the result to be other than the specific first determination result. It is possible to prevent the game from shifting to a gaming state, and this has the effect of increasing expectations for the fulfillment of the first condition and improving interest.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D3, the first condition is that the second benefit is granted when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine D4 is configured such that the following conditions can be met.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the provision of the second benefit is a requirement for the first condition to be satisfied, so it is possible to increase the value of the second benefit. There is an effect that it can be done.

<Characteristics Group E> (Remaining period effect of advantageous period Group C effect)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information on a display means to indicate a first determination result by the first determination means. , first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information to be displayed by the first dynamic display means; a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for displaying the first identification information; and a second determining means capable of executing a second determination. , a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; and a second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means. a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; and a display mode for displaying the second determination result on the display means, the second identification information is a second benefit granting means capable of granting a second benefit that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the first identification information being dynamically displayed by the first dynamic displaying means; a period in which the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forced to be other than the specific first determination result based on the establishment of the first condition; a first control means capable of executing one control; and a suggestion indicating a remaining period of the first dynamic display period when the first identification information that is the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it has a suggestive performance execution means capable of executing a performance.

BACKGROUND ART Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines enter a winning state when the result of a lottery, which is conducted based on a game ball entering a starting prize opening, is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the winning state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, by changing the type of starting winning slot that the player mainly uses to win a prize in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game can be varied depending on the change in the gaming state, and a variety of games can be played. An attempt has been made to increase interest by providing players with the following information (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-000392). The lottery game that is executed when a game ball enters the starting winning slot is only displayed in a predetermined fluctuating pattern, making the game monotonous and causing players to quickly get bored with the game. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine E1, when a specific first determination result is dynamically displayed, a suggestion mode suggesting the remaining dynamic display period is displayed, so that when the first condition is satisfied, the first determination result is displayed dynamically. The player can recognize the period during which the granting of the first benefit is regulated, and the timing of the granting of the first benefit can also generate interest, thereby suppressing the problem of players getting bored with the game early. There is an effect that it can be done.

The gaming machine E1 has a gaming state setting means that can set a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state setting means is configured to set a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. 1 gaming state is set, the second gaming state is set based on the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result. Characteristic gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, when the first gaming state is set, the first identification information corresponding to a specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. This has the effect of increasing value.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first condition is that the second benefit is granted when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that it is configured to be able to be established.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first condition can be satisfied on the condition that the second benefit is granted, so the value of being granted the second benefit can be satisfied. It has the effect of increasing

<Characteristics Group F> (Informs you of the period when winning a small hit is advantageous)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information on a display means to indicate a first determination result by the first determination means. , first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information to be displayed by the first dynamic display means; a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed in a display mode for displaying the first identification information; and a second determining means capable of executing a second determination. , a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; and a second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means. a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information; and a display mode for displaying the second determination result on the display means, the second identification information is a gaming machine having a second benefit granting means capable of granting a second benefit that is advantageous to the player when the second benefit is displayed, based on the timing of granting the second benefit; A gaming machine F1 characterized in that it has a privilege variable means for varying the privileges to be played.

BACKGROUND ART Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines enter a winning state when the result of a lottery, which is conducted based on a game ball entering a starting prize opening, is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the winning state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, by changing the type of starting winning slot that the player mainly uses to win a prize in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game can be varied depending on the change in the gaming state, and a variety of games can be played. An attempt has been made to increase interest by providing players with the following information (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-000392). The lottery game that is executed when a game ball enters the starting winning slot is only displayed in a predetermined fluctuating pattern, making the game monotonous and causing players to quickly get bored with the game. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine F1, since the benefit granted as the second benefit is varied depending on the timing of granting the second benefit, it is possible to make the player interested in the timing at which the second benefit is granted. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of players getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine F1, the dynamic display is performed based on the fact that the second benefit is granted during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine comprising a first control means capable of executing a first control for forcibly changing the first determination result corresponding to the first identification information to a value other than the specific first determination result. F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, by executing the first control, the provision of the first benefit can be avoided, and the value of the second benefit can be increased. be.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first benefit granting means grants one benefit type from a plurality of different benefit types as the first benefit, and when the first control is executed, The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that it is capable of informing suggestion information based on the benefit type in the first benefit that could have been given.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, it is possible for the player to recognize the type of the first benefit that was not given by means of the suggestive information, and the effect is that the interest in the game can be improved. be.

<Feature G group> (Notification of discarded content)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; and a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information on a display means to indicate a first determination result by the first determination means. , a first dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means, and a second determining means capable of executing a second determination. , a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means on the display means; and a second identification information displayed by the second dynamic display means. a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information, wherein the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit corresponding to one benefit type from a plurality of different benefit types when displayed, and a first dynamic display means to select the first benefit type to be given to the player. During the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information is forcibly applied to the specific a first control means capable of executing a first control other than the first determination result; A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it has a notification means for notifying suggestive information capable of suggesting information corresponding to the type of the first benefit that has been given.

BACKGROUND ART Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines enter a winning state when the result of a lottery, which is conducted based on a game ball entering a starting prize opening, is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the winning state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, by changing the type of starting winning slot that the player mainly uses to win a prize in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game can be varied depending on the change in the gaming state, and a variety of games can be played. An attempt has been made to increase interest by providing players with the following information (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-000392). The lottery game that is executed when a game ball enters the starting winning slot is only displayed in a predetermined fluctuating pattern, making the game monotonous and causing players to quickly get bored with the game. There was a point.

According to the gaming machine G1, the player can recognize the type of the first benefit that was not given due to the execution of the first control based on the suggestive information, which improves the interest of the game and allows the player to quickly This has the effect of suppressing the problem of getting bored with the game.

In gaming machine G1, the first condition is satisfied on the condition that the second benefit is granted when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine G2 is characterized in that it is configured to enable.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the first condition can be satisfied by providing the second benefit, so that there is an effect that the value of the second benefit can be increased.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 has a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the provision of the second benefit, and the performance execution means varies the performance based on the suggestion information. The game machine G3 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the performance executed based on the granting of the second benefit is varied by the suggestion information, so that the first benefit to be granted and the granting This has the effect of increasing interest by making it possible to compare with the second benefit provided.

The game machine Z1 is characterized in that each of the game machines is a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball enters a prize opening located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, with winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A game machine Z3 characterized in that each of the game machines is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the winning state ends. In this conventional gaming machine, by changing the type of starting winning slot that the player mainly uses to win a prize in the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the interest of the game can be varied depending on the change in the gaming state, and a variety of games can be played. An attempt has been made to increase interest by providing players with the following information (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-000392).
However, the lottery game that is executed when a game ball enters the starting winning slot is only displayed in a predetermined fluctuating pattern, making the game monotonous and causing the player to quickly get bored with the game. There was a problem.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 includes a first determining means capable of executing the first determination, and a displaying means for displaying first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determining means. a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information; and a first dynamic display period capable of determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means. a first benefit that can provide a first benefit that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed on the determining means and the display means in a display mode for showing the specific first determination result; a second determination means capable of executing a second determination; and a second action capable of dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means on a display means. a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information to be displayed by the second dynamic display means; 2; a second benefit granting means capable of granting a second benefit that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for indicating a determination result; a first gaming state; a gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state; During the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, it is possible to switch from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, and the gaming machine , which sets a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player from the second gaming state, and the first condition is satisfied during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. a first control means capable of executing a first control to forcibly change the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information to a value other than the specific first determination result based on the first determination information; It is something that you have.
In the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the first condition is such that when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed, It is configured such that it can be established on the condition that the second benefit is granted.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, in which the second determination means is capable of determining a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result. , a special benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit is provided to the player based on the second special determination result.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the first determination means capable of executing the first determination and the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. and a first dynamic display period determining means that can determine a first dynamic display period of the first identification information displayed by the first dynamic display means; a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed on the display means in a display mode for indicating the specific first determination result; a second determination means capable of executing a second determination; and a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means. , a second dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information to be displayed by the second dynamic display means; a second benefit granting means capable of granting a second benefit that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed in a display mode for displaying the second identification information; a first gaming state; a gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state that is advantageous to the player; It is possible to switch from the first gaming state to the second gaming state during the period in which the game is displayed, and when the first privilege is awarded, the gaming machine can switch from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. A gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is set from the gaming state, and during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, based on the establishment of the first condition, The first control means is capable of executing a first control to force the first determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed first identification information to be other than the specific first determination result. .
Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of the player getting bored with the game early.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first condition can be satisfied on the condition that the second benefit is granted when the first identification information corresponding to the specific first determination result is dynamically displayed. It is composed of
Therefore, by providing the second benefit, it is possible to avoid the setting of a disadvantageous gaming state for the player due to the provision of the first benefit, so that players who do not play the game expecting to receive the second benefit are provided with the second benefit. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second determination means is capable of determining a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, and based on the fact that the special second determination result is determined, the second determination means determines the first determination result. A special benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the bonus is given to the player.
Therefore, as a result of the second determination, a special benefit that is more advantageous than the first benefit is granted to the player, so even if the provision of the first benefit is regulated, problems that reduce the player's desire to play can be suppressed. There is an effect that it can be done.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine )
S405 First determination means
S508 First performance execution means
Part of S653 second determination means
Part of S1101 second discrimination means
Part of S1301 second determination means
Part of S1304 second determination means
S1306 Second performance execution means

Claims (1)

a first determination means capable of performing a first determination;
Based on the fact that the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is a specific first discrimination result, the first effect is capable of executing a first effect that is terminated when a predetermined period of time elapses. A performance execution means,
a second determination means capable of performing a second determination;
A gaming machine comprising a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect based on the second discrimination result by the second discrimination means being a specific second discrimination result,
The gaming machine is
At the timing when the first performance is started , the first state is such that the second determination by the second determination means can be performed ,
A second state is set in which the second determination by the second determining means is not performed when the first performance is terminated by being continuously executed for the predetermined period after the first performance is started. configured to
Based on the fact that the second discrimination result by the second discrimination means has become the specific second discrimination result, from the start of the first production until the predetermined period of continuous execution , the second discrimination result is the specific second discrimination result. It is configured so that it is possible to forcibly terminate one performance,
The game player is configured such that when the second determination result is the specific second determination result, a benefit that is more advantageous to the player is provided than when the second determination result is not the specific second determination result;
configured to be capable of displaying a suggestion mode for suggesting that the first state is set during a period in which the first state is set;
The first state is terminated when the number of times the second determination is performed by the second determination means is a predetermined number of times after the first performance is continuously performed for the predetermined period of time. It is possible to configure
A gaming machine characterized in that the first discrimination by the first discrimination means is not executed during a period in which the first performance is executed .

Images